JP7349408B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and relates to technology that contributes to improving the performance of gaming machines.

In pinball game machines and rotary game machines, various effects are made using liquid crystal display screens, speakers, LEDs, accessories, vibrating bodies, blowers, etc. to enliven the game.
The following patent documents disclose techniques for controlling various performance operations.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-64693

However, in order to realize a variety of performances, the number of boards has increased, wiring has become more complicated and difficult, and the power supply has accordingly become more complicated.
Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to propose a desirable configuration for a gaming machine in order to alleviate these problems.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a multilayer structure including a surface layer forming a front surface, a back layer forming a back surface, and one or more inner layers formed between the surface layer and the back layer. The first board has a terminal assigned to a first power supply voltage transmitted from the second board and a terminal assigned to a second power supply voltage transmitted from the second board. an input connector having a terminal assigned to the first power supply voltage to be transmitted to a third board, and an output connector having a terminal assigned to the second power supply voltage to be transmitted to the third board; is attached to one of the inner layers as a pattern having a planar area wider than the diameter of the interlayer conductive portion, and a first power supply pattern serving as wiring for the first power supply voltage; A second power supply pattern is formed as a wiring for a power supply voltage of 2, and the input connector and the output connector are connected to the first power supply pattern and the second power supply pattern on the first board when viewed in the thickness direction of the board. The surface layer or the back layer is provided with a pattern-free region where no conductor pattern is formed at the edge of the substrate, and the first power pattern and the second power pattern A conductor pattern is formed on the inner layer on which the pattern is formed, which is closer to the edge of the substrate than the front layer or the back layer, and extends to a position that overlaps a part of the non-patterned area in the stacking direction. has been done.
Further, in the inner layer, a pattern as a solid ground or a solid power source may be formed up to a position close to the edge of the substrate.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, an efficient configuration for responding to diversified performances can be realized.

1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a game board of a game machine according to an embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a control configuration of a gaming machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a look-ahead preview effect according to the embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment with the door opened. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment with the inner frame opened. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the board arrangement on the back side of the game board according to the embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the board arrangement of the door and inner frame of the gaming machine according to the embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the board arrangement of the inner frame of the gaming machine according to the embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the arrangement of various devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a connection configuration of a board. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of power supply system input/output for the power supply board 300. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of an inner frame LED relay board 400. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of an inner frame LED relay board 400. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a signal flow of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a signal flow of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a relay board 550. FIG. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit lower right LED board 620. It is a circuit diagram of the side unit lower right LED board 620. 6 is a circuit diagram of a side unit upper LED board 630. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of a button LED connection board 640. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of a button LED board 660. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of a button LED board 660. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. It is a circuit diagram of the left relay board 720 on the back of the panel. 7 is a circuit diagram of a decorative board 740. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of a relay board 760. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED board 780. FIG. FIG. 8 is a circuit diagram of a board back lower relay board 800. 8 is a circuit diagram of a decorative board 820. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram outlining the transmission of power supply voltage between boards. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of wiring paths between substrates. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of transmission of power supply voltage between boards. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of the power supply system of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the power supply system of the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of transmission of power supply voltage between boards. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a buffer and signal branching. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a signal path of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a buffer and signal branching. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a buffer and signal branching. 7 is a circuit diagram of a modified example of an LED board 780. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the pin arrangement of the connector. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the arrangement of components on the surface of the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the component arrangement on the back side of the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a pattern on the surface of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a pattern of the first inner layer of the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a pattern of the second inner layer of the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a pattern on the back side of the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of power supply wiring of a modified example of the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of another board.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.
<1. Structure of gaming machine＞
<2. Control configuration of gaming machine>
[2.1 Main control board]
[2.2 Production control board]
<3. Overview of operation>
[3.1 Symbol variation display game]
[3.2 Game status]
[3.3 About winning]
[3.4 About the performance]
<4. Opening/closing structure and board arrangement>
<5. Board connection configuration>
[5.1 Connection status of each board]
[5.2 Inner frame LED relay board 400]
[5.3 Front frame LED connection board 500]
[5.4 Relay board 550]
[5.5 Side unit upper right LED board 600]
[5.6 Side unit lower right LED board 620]
[5.7 Side unit upper LED board 630]
[5.8 Button LED connection board 640]
[5.9 Button LED board 660]
[5.10 LED connection board 700]
[5.11 Back panel left relay board 720]
[5.12 Decorative board 740]
[5.13 Relay board 760]
[5.14 LED board 780]
[5.15 Lower back relay board 800]
[5.16 Decorative board 820]
<6. Explanation of notable configurations>
[6.1 Serial data signal between inner frame 2 and door 6]
[6.2 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (part 1)]
[6.3 Connector structure]
[6.4 Wiring route]
[6.5 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (Part 2)]
[6.6 Power supply route]
[6.7 Separation of power supply voltage system]
[6.8 Number of power lines and ground lines]
[6.9 Buffers and signal branching]
[6.10 Power supply using electrical components]
[6.11 Connectors and signal wiring]
[6.12 Analog signal relay/wiring]
[6.13 Pattern configuration]
[6.14 Others]

<1. Structure of gaming machine>

The structure of a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the external appearance of the pachinko game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board 3 included in the pachinko game machine 1.
Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame member, a door member provided to be openable and closable with respect to the frame member, and a replacement member attached to the frame member so as to be replaceable.
The pachinko game machine 1 described below has an inner frame 2 as a structure corresponding to a frame member, a door 6 as a structure corresponding to a door member, and a game board 3 as a structure corresponding to a replacement member.

A pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "gaming machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is installed in an attached game board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is exposed to the opening of the inner frame 2. have Since the game board 3 can be replaced and removed from the inner frame 2, it can be called a replacement member.
A door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

On the front side (player side) of the door 6, a side unit 10 is formed as a decorative unit that surrounds all or part of the circumference of the game board 3, for example.
The side unit 10 itself has a decorative shape that matches the theme of the gaming machine 1, and may also be provided with presentation elements such as LEDs and accessories inside, thereby creating a presentation effect that conveys the atmosphere of the game to the player. demonstrate. This side unit 10 is a unit that is replaceably attached to the door 6.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the door 6, and by inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the door 6 with respect to the inner frame 2 is released. When the door 6 is operated to the other side, the locked state of the inner frame 2 relative to the outer frame 4 is released, and the inner frame 2 can be opened to the front.

A front operation panel 7 is disposed below the door 6 and is pivotally supported to the inner frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable.
The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing ejected game balls.

The upper tray unit 8 also includes a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the gaming machine 1, and a ball removal button 14 for discharging game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for making a request and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted into the game ball lending device are provided.
Further, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a performance button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. This production button 13 becomes operable (input accepted) when the built-in lamp (button LED 75) is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and a predetermined operation (pressing, repeated pressing, long pressing, etc.) is performed while the built-in lamp is lit. By doing this, it is possible to bring about changes in the performance.
The upper tray unit 8 also has a cross key 15a for users such as players and hall staff to select various items and give directions, and a decision button 15b for instructing to decide on a selected item. An operator is provided.

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 is provided for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3).

Further, on both sides of the upper part of the door 6 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15, speakers 46 are provided to produce a sound production effect (sound effect) by sound. In FIG. 1, only two speakers 46 above the door 6 are shown.
The plurality of speakers 46 enable so-called stereo sound reproduction or multi-channel sound reproduction of sounds related to the performance.

In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, full-color LED light effects, etc., see FIG. 3) are provided at appropriate locations on the door 6 to provide a light effect through light decoration. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light production) serving as the decorative lamps 45 are provided around the pachinko game machine 1, for example, around the periphery of the door 6 or inside the side unit 10.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 2.
On the illustrated game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game balls is attached in an annular manner as a board partitioning member, and a generally circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, The four corners are non-gaming areas.

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 3a, for example, three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas) independently display a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.). A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is equipped with a liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 that is capable of variable display operation (fluctuating display and stop display) of left symbols (compatible with the left display area), middle symbols (compatible with the middle display area), and right symbols (compatible with the right display area). It is provided.
This liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects in the form of images in addition to the variable display operation of decorative patterns under the control of the effect control board 30 which will be described later.

In addition, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a in a form that extends far around the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, and protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls. It acts as a channel distribution means that allows channels to be divided into left and right.
In this embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged approximately at the center of the game area 3a so that the presence of the center decoration 48 forms a flow path for the game ball on both upper sides (left and right sides) of the game area 3a. ing. The game ball shot into the upper side of the game area 3a by the firing device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame 48b, and is divided into the left downstream path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and the right downstream path 3c on the right side. flow down either.

In addition, the non-gaming area at the bottom of the game board 3 serves as a various function display section, and includes a special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) using a dot display and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). display means) is provided.
Note that various function display sections including the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are shown enlarged in FIG.

In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of a "special symbol" expressed by a dot display. Then, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a decorative pattern in the form of an image in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and displays the decorative pattern along with various preview effects (effect images). Symbol variation display games are to be executed (details regarding these symbol variation display games will be explained later).

Further, in the various function display sections, a composite display device (LED display for pending composite display) 38c, which is made of a dot display like the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, is arranged. What is called "compound" is the five functions: special symbols 1 and 2, display of the number of pending balls for normal symbol operation, and status notification when the variable time reduction function is activated (time saving mode) and high probability state (high accuracy mode). This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as a "compound display device") having a display function.

Further, the various function display sections are provided with a composite display device 38d, which also consists of a dot display.
In this composite display device 38d, the number of rounds is displayed to notify the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by a combination of the lighting/extinguishing states of the four LEDs. For example, the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot is notified based on a combination of the lighting/extinguishing states of four LEDs.
Further, in the composite display device 38d, a normal symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of a normal symbol expressed by one LED as a normal symbol display.
Further, the composite display device 38d is configured to perform right-handed display using three LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48 in FIG. 2, there is provided a normal variable winning device 41 which includes a starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) inside. A detection sensor 34a (starting port sensor 34a, see FIG. 3) is formed inside the starting port 34 to detect passage of a game ball.
Further, the right downstream path 3c is provided with a starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) that opens and closes, and inside is provided with a detection sensor 35a (starting device) that detects passage of a game ball. A mouth sensor 35a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

The starting opening 34, which is the first special symbol starting opening, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 1", and may also be referred to as "special symbol 1" in some cases). This is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of (hereinafter referred to as abbreviated), and is configured as a winning rate fixed winning device that does not have a starting opening opening/closing means (means that allows the starting opening to be opened or enlarged). In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, the game nail, the windmill 44, the center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the game balls that have flown down the left flow path 3b are transferred to the starting port 34. The structure is such that it is easy to enter the ball (win a prize), whereas the structure is such that it is difficult or impossible for the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c to enter the ball.

The starting port 35 is for starting the variable display operation of the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 2", and may be abbreviated as "special symbol 2" in some cases) on the special symbol display device 38b. This is a winning opening according to the conditions, and the winning area of this starting opening 35 is configured to be openable and closable into an open state where winning is possible and a closed state where winning is not possible.

Further, two general winning holes 43 are provided on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, and a general winning hole sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed inside each of them to detect passage of a game ball. There is.
Furthermore, within the area of the game board, a movable accessory (not shown) that provides a visual presentation effect is arranged at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball.

Further, on the diagonally upper right side of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the middle part of the right downstream path 3c, there is a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting port) consisting of a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass. means) are provided. This normal symbol starting hole 37 is a winning hole related to the variable display operation of the normal symbols of the composite display device 38d, and inside thereof, a normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) that detects a passing game ball is installed. It is formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downstream path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downstream path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left downstream path 3b, or may be formed in both downstream paths, respectively.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start opening 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downstream path 3c, there is a special variable winning device 52 (special A big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 50 is formed inside the electric accessory.
Around the grand prize opening 50, a guide section 55 and a windmill 53 are provided that serve to draw the game balls flowing down toward the grand prize opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows.
The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 and has passed through the right downstream path 3c is guided by the guide portion 55 in the direction of the big prize opening 50. If the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state (great winning opening state), the game ball is guided into the grand prize opening 50.

Note that in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player aims the firing position toward the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the player aims so that the game ball passes through the right downstream path 3c), the starting port 34 The game ball is configured to be difficult to or not guided to the side. Therefore, if the winning opening is in the "big winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to enter the starting opening 34 of the normal variable winning winning device 41.
Further, the starting port 35 is configured to operate in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than in the normal state when the game state is in a gaming state accompanied by a state with electric support, which will be described later.

In the case of this embodiment, the way the player plays to create an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in a gaming state that involves the "state without electric support" described below, it is considered advantageous to "hit to the left" in which the game ball is aimed so that it passes through the left downstream path 3b; If the game state is accompanied by a "presence state", it is considered advantageous to "hit right" in which the game ball is aimed so that it passes through the right downstream path 3c.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among the various winning openings provided in the gaming area 3a, a promise is made for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 balls for the starting hole 34 or 35, 13 balls for the big winning hole 50, and 10 balls for the general winning hole 43) is determined by the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). It is now paid out from The game balls that do not enter into each of the above-mentioned winning holes are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out hole 49.

Here, "winning" refers to a winning opening that takes a game ball into its interior, or a winning opening that is not a structure that takes a gaming ball inside but is a pass-through type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting opening 37). If it is, it means that a game ball passes through that gate, and in reality, if a game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, a "winning" will occur in that winning hole. be treated as such. The game balls related to this winning are also referred to as "winning balls." In addition, if a game ball enters the winning hole, that game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch, so unless otherwise specified in this specification, it does not matter whether the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection switch or not. Regardless, the term "winning" may include the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Control configuration of gaming machine>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing gaming operation control of the gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 3.
The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 that centrally controls control related to overall gaming operations (gaming operation control), and a production means that receives production control commands from the main control board 20. A performance control board 30 (performance control means) that centrally controls the execution of the performance (appearance control), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls, and an external power source (not shown). ) and a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) that generates and supplies the necessary power to the gaming machine 1.
Note that in FIG. 3, power supply routes to each part are omitted.

[2.1 Main control board]
The main control board 20 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU (Central Processing Unit) 20a (main control CPU), and also stores various data necessary for controlling the gaming operations, in addition to control programs that describe gaming operation control procedures. It is equipped with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 20b (main control ROM) for storage, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 20c (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory, making up a microcomputer as a whole. .

Although not shown, the main control board 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing periodic interrupts, a constant period pulse output generation function (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function, and a main control board 20. An interrupt controller circuit that provides an interrupt enable/disable function such as a timer interrupt that provides an interrupt signal to the CPU 20a, and a main control circuit that outputs a system reset signal upon detecting power-on, power-off, power abnormality, etc. A reset circuit that can reset the CPU 20a, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation of the control program, and a prohibition of running outside the designated area that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range. (IAT) circuit, and a counter circuit for generating random numbers within a certain range using hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers and a sampling circuit that samples random numbers from the random number generation circuit at predetermined timing, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The main control CPU 20a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, and uses the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number (random number for jackpot determination (random number size: 65536)). The random numbers are obtained and used for the jackpot lottery. Note that the internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent cheating such as trying to win.

The main control board 20 includes a starting hole sensor 34a that detects winning (ball entering) into the starting hole 34, a starting hole sensor 35a that detects winning into the starting hole 35, and a starting hole sensor 35a that detects passage of the normal symbol starting hole 37. The normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a that detects the winning hole, the big winning hole sensor 52a that detects the winning into the big winning hole 50, the general winning hole sensor 43a that detects the winning into the general winning hole 43, and the out hole 49. An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting game balls (out balls) is connected, and the main control board 20 is capable of receiving detection signals output from these. The main control board 20 is capable of grasping into which winning hole the game ball has entered based on the detection signals from each sensor.

In addition, the main control board 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected, and the main control board 20 can transmit control signals for controlling these.

Further, a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. . Furthermore, a composite display device 38c is connected to the main control board 20, and is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of the number of reservations and the display of the status.

Further, a composite display device 38d is connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 sends control signals for display-controlling the normal symbol display, right-handed display, and round display displayed on the composite display device 38d. Sending is possible.

Further, an external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame is connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 connects to a predetermined hall computer HC provided outside the gaming machine via the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, jackpot information, prize ball number information, symbol variation execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring gaming information from the main control board 20 and comprehensively managing the operating status of the gaming machines in the pachinko hall.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control board 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command regarding payout (number of prize balls) is sent to the payout control board 29. It is possible to send a payout control command that specifies a payout control command.

A launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls are connected to the payout control board 29. The main roles of this payout control board 29 include receiving payout control commands from the main control board 20, controlling prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and transmitting status signals to the main control board 20. It is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with an out-of-supply detection sensor 19a that detects a lack of supply of game balls, and a ball count sensor 19b that detects the game balls (prize balls) to be paid out. It is possible to receive each detection signal. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c that drives a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls, and a payout control board 29 is configured to control the payout motor 19c. control signals can be transmitted.

Further, the payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 that detects when the upper tray 9 is full of game balls (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the stored state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9). , a front door open sensor 61 (for example, a detection sensor that detects the open state of the door 6 or the inner frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can send various status signals to the main control board 20 based on detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the front door open sensor 61, the out-of-supply detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It becomes. This status signal includes a ball jam signal indicating a full state, a door open signal indicating that at least the inner frame 2 is open, an out-of-supply signal indicating an insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and a prize ball signal. It is configured to be able to transmit various status signals, including a counting error signal indicating insufficient dispensing of balls or an abnormality occurring in the ball counting sensor 19b, and a dispensing completion signal indicating that dispensing operation has been completed. Based on these status signals, the main control board 20 determines the open state of the inner frame 2 (door open error), whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (out of supply error), and whether the upper tray 9 is open or not. Monitor the full state (ball clogging error), etc.

Furthermore, a firing control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and is capable of transmitting a permission signal for permitting firing to the firing control board 28. The firing control board 28 controls the energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the dispensing control board 29, and controls the operation of the firing operation handle 15. This realizes the firing action of the game ball. Specifically, it is detected that a firing permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (firing permission signal ON state), and that the touch sensor provided on the firing operation handle 15 detects that the player is touching the handle. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the firing permission signal is not output (firing permission signal OFF state), no firing operation is performed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Furthermore, the strength with which the game ball is launched can be changed according to the amount of operation of the firing operation handle 15.
Note that when the payout control board 29 detects the ball jamming error, it transmits a ball jamming signal to the main control board 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (firing permission signal OFF), and the upper tray 9 Control is performed to stop the launching operation until the full state is resolved.
Further, the payout control board 29 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 on the condition that firing permission is instructed by the main control board 20.

Here, the main control board 20 is connected to a setting key switch 94 and a RAM clear switch 98, and is capable of receiving detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for inputting an instruction to initialize a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to a setting change mode (when an ON operation is performed) by inserting a setting key owned by a hall staff and operating the ON/OFF operation when the power is turned on.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the setting value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value representing the level of probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned on/off in response to the operation of a RAM clear button that is operable with the inner frame 2 open.
Further, the setting key switch 94 is provided with a corresponding key cylinder into which the above-mentioned setting key can be inserted and removed, and is turned on and off when the setting key inserted into the key cylinder is rotated in the forward direction. It is turned OFF by being rotated in the opposite direction from the ON state.
The key cylinder is provided so that it can be operated by inserting a setting key when the inner frame 2 is open. Note that the key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting a setting key.

In this example, the above-mentioned RAM clear button is also used for changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for sequentially advancing the set value Ve.

The RAM clear switch 98 and the setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine 1. For example, it is placed on the main control board 20.

Further, a setting/performance display 97 is connected to the main control board 20.
The setting/performance display 97 includes, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as a display means capable of displaying a setting value Ve and performance information (described later). The setting/performance display 97 is mounted, for example, on the main control board 20 at an easily visible position.
The main control board 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for displaying setting values Ve and performance information to the setting/performance display 97.

Here, the setting value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least a jackpot (a winning type that causes a condition device described below to operate) in stages (for example, six stages of settings 1 to 6). The higher the setting value Ve, the higher the winning probability (setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and from then on, the winning probability increases in ascending order of the setting value), which works in the player's favor. There is. In other words, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the so-called "machine discount (ball payout rate, payout rate)" becomes, which is advantageous to the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the probability of winning a jackpot, a machine discount, etc., and it means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a profit state that affects the player. , in this embodiment, the advantage of the game is defined according to each setting value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are six levels of the set value Ve that can be used according to the rules (levels of advantageousness). Specifically, it is assumed that the legally usable range of the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as "usable range Re") is in the range of "1" to "6".
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only some of the setting values Ve that can be used according to the regulations. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 of this example uses only three values, for example, "1", "2", and "6" among the set values Ve within the usable range Re, "1" to "6". do. In other words, the specification limits the probability of winning to three stages instead of six, which is the maximum according to the rules.
Hereinafter, the range of the setting value Ve actually used in the pachinko game machine 1, specifically the range of the setting value Ve actually used among the setting values Ve within the usable range Re (in the above example, "1 ”, “2”, and “6”) is expressed as “usage range Ru”.

The set value Ve is set exclusively by hall staff such as hall clerks based on the business strategy of the hall (gaming parlor). In addition, when there are multiple types of jackpots, the winning probability of which jackpot is changed according to the set value Ve, and the type of jackpot to be targeted can be determined as appropriate. For example, if there are three types of jackpots, jackpots 1 to 3, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the winning probability for all jackpots 1 to 3 may be. The total winning probability may be increased. Furthermore, the probability of winning some jackpots may be increased. For example, only the probability of winning for jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the probability of winning for jackpot 3 may be set to a constant value with all set values Ve.

(About changing settings)
In order to change the set value Ve, in this example, with the power of the gaming machine 1 turned off and the inner frame 2 released, the setting key switch 94 is turned on (operated to the setting change mode side), and While the RAM clear button is pressed (RAM clear switch 98 is ON), power is turned on to the gaming machine 1. Then, the current set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display 97, and a transition is made to a "setting change mode" in which the set value Ve (1, 2, 6 in this example) can be changed.

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is performed in the main control side main processing described later (see step S104 in FIG. 8). When the above operating conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are satisfied, processing for changing the settings is executed accordingly.

After transitioning to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button that functions as a change operator for the setting value Ve is turned on, the current display value of the setting/performance display 97 changes from 1→2→6→1→ 2→6→...'' within the usage range Ru. When the setting key switch 94 is turned off when the desired setting value Ve is reached, the setting value Ve is determined, and information about the determined setting value Ve is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended and the display on the setting/performance display 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the state shifts to a state where game progress is allowed.

(About performance display)
The main control board 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information on the setting/performance display 97.
Performance information is information that pachinko halls and related agencies want to confirm, and typical examples include information regarding the presence or absence of fraudulent prize balls such as excessive prize balls for gaming machine 1, and the original ball output performance of gaming machine 1. It is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player plays the game, unlike preview effects and the like.

For this reason, the setting/performance display 97 is installed inside the gaming machine 1, for example, on the main control board 20, the payout control board 29, the firing control board 28, the above-mentioned relay board, the performance control board 30, or on the board case (which protects the board). (protective cover), etc., are provided at a position where the displayed information can be viewed when the inner frame 2 is in an open state.

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of balls paid out due to winnings during a specific state (total number of prize balls during a specific state: Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) divided by the number of pieces (β pieces) can be employed as the performance information.
The above-mentioned "total number of paid out balls" is the total value of game balls (prize balls) that are paid out when winning in the winning holes (starting hole 34, starting hole 35, general winning hole 43, big winning hole 50). . In the case of this embodiment, there are three starting holes 34 or 35, 13 big winning holes 50, and 10 general winning holes 43.
Further, which state to adopt as the specific state can be determined as appropriate depending on the state under which performance information is desired to be grasped. In the case of this embodiment, any state among the normal state, potential state, time saving state, variable probability state, and jackpot game can be adopted. Furthermore, multiple types of states may be measured. For example, the normal state, variable probability state, all gaming states except during winning games, etc., and the types to be measured can be determined as appropriate.
Further, as the period in the specific state, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is either low probability state or high probability state may be adopted.
Alternatively, the total number of payouts may be determined by excluding one or more specific winning holes from the measurement target (total number of payouts excluding specific winning holes). For example, the total number of payouts may be determined by excluding the big winning hole 50 from the measurement target among the winning holes.

(2) Alternatively, only one of the total number of paid out balls, the total number of paid out balls excluding specific winning holes, and the total number of out pitches may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.

In this embodiment, the total number of pitches put out during the normal state (number of pitches put out at normal time) and the total number of out pitches during the normal state (number of pitches out at normal time) are measured in real time, and the number of pitches put out at normal time is calculated as the number of pitches out at normal time. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 100 by 100 (the value calculated as the number of pieces paid out during normal times÷ the number of pieces out during normal times×100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as "normal time ratio information"). Note that the displayed value at this time is a value rounded off to the first decimal place.
Therefore, the respective data of the number of balls paid out during normal times, the number of out balls during normal times, and the ratio information during normal times are stored in the corresponding areas of the main control RAM 20c (total prize balls storage area during specified periods, storage area for the number of out balls during specified periods, and specified ratio information storage area). They are stored (memorized) in each. However, rather than simply permanently measuring and displaying performance information, the measurement is temporarily terminated when the total number of out pitches reaches a predetermined prescribed number (for example, 60,000). This prescribed number is not the total number of out pitches in the normal state, but the total number of out pitches during all game states (including during winning games) (hereinafter referred to as "all state out number"). This total state out number is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (all state out number storage area) of the main control RAM 20c. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the storage area for the total number of awarded pitches during the specific period, the storage area for the number of outs during the specific period, the specific ratio information storage area, and the storage area for the number of outs in all states will be abbreviated as the "measurement information storage area."

Then, the normal time ratio information at the end point is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the main control RAM 20c (the current normal time ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal time payout number, normal time After clearing the number of out pitches and the number of out pitches in all states, start counting again (start measuring the number of pitches paid out in normal times, the number of out pitches in normal times, the normal time ratio information, and the number of out pitches in all states). The setting/performance display 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. In addition, it is possible to display not only the previous information but also the history of the time before the last time or the time before that (three times ago), and it is possible to appropriately determine how many times before the information is to be displayed.

Here, in the case of this example, the setting value Ve and performance information are alternatively displayed on the setting/performance display 97. Specifically, in this example, setting changes and setting confirmation are performed only at startup when the power is turned on, so settings and settings are changed in response to the transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. The setting value Ve is displayed on the performance display 97, and after setting changes and setting confirmations are completed, performance information is displayed.
Note that the configuration is not limited to displaying the setting value Ve and the performance information on a common display, but a configuration in which the set value Ve and performance information are displayed on separate displays may also be adopted. In that case, the setting value Ve and performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Production control command)
The main control board 20 is capable of transmitting various performance control commands including information regarding the special symbol variation display game, information regarding errors, etc. to the performance control board 30 depending on the processing state. However, in order to prevent fraud such as cheating, the main control board 20 only transmits signals to the production control board 30, and has a one-way communication configuration in which it cannot receive signals from the production control board 30. It has become.

Here, the production control command defines the function with a 2-byte structure consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 is ON, and Bit 7 of EVENT is OFF. When transmitting this information as valid information, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the main control CPU 20a sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the production control board 30, and sends the first strobe signal after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting. Send. Further, event information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the strobe signal was transmitted, and a second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the main control CPU 20a for a predetermined period to ensure that the production control CPU 30a can receive commands.

[2.2 Production control board]
The performance control board 30 is equipped with a microprocessor that includes a performance control CPU 30a, a performance control ROM 30b that stores performance data required for performance control processing, and a performance control RAM 30c that functions as a work area and buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a computer, and is also equipped with a sound control section (sound source IC), an RTC (Real Time Clock) function section, a counter circuit, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc., and controls the overall production operation.

The performance control CPU 30a performs arithmetic processing for various performance operations and controls each performance means based on the performance control program and the performance control commands received from the main control section 20. In the case of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the presentation means include the liquid crystal display device 36 (main liquid crystal display device 36M, sub liquid crystal display device 36S), optical display device 45a, sound generator 46a, and a movable device not shown in the drawings. It becomes a physical object.

The production control ROM 30b stores a control program for production operations by the production control CPU 30a and various data necessary for production operation control.
The performance control RAM 30c is used as a work area used by the performance control CPU 30a for various calculation processes, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, processing data, etc.
Note that the production control board 30 has a configuration in which, for example, a 1-chip microcomputer and its peripheral circuits are mounted, but various configurations of the production control board 30 are possible. For example, in addition to the microcomputer, there is an interface circuit with each part, a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers for lottery for performances, a CTC for various time counting, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit, and an interrupt signal to the performance control CPU 30a. In some cases, an interrupt controller circuit or the like is provided.

The main roles of the production control board 30 are to receive production control commands from the main control unit 20, to select and decide production based on the production control commands, to control the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 (supply display data), and to control the display of the sound generator 46a. This includes audio output control of the optical display device 45a (LED), operation control of the movable accessory (drive control of the movable accessory motor 80c), and the like.

Since this production control board 30 also has a function as a control device for the liquid crystal display device 36, the production control board 30 also has functions as a so-called VDP (Video Display Processor), image ROM, and VRAM (Video RAM). The production control CPU 30a also functions as a liquid crystal control section.
VDP refers to a function that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing.
The image ROM refers to a memory in which image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing is stored.
The VRAM is an image memory area that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP.

With these configurations, the performance control board 30 generates various image data based on commands from the main control unit 20, and outputs it to the main liquid crystal display device 36M and the sub liquid crystal display device 36S. As a result, various effects images are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 36M and the sub liquid crystal display device 36S.
Here, the "liquid crystal display device 36" shown in FIG. 2 is the "main liquid crystal display device 36M." The illustration of the sub-liquid crystal display device 36S in FIG. 2 is omitted.

The production control board 30 also has a sound control section (for example, the sound controller 230 in FIG. 4) for the sound generation device 46a including a plurality of speakers 46, and the sound signal outputted by the sound control section is amplified by the amplifier section 46d. and is supplied to the speaker 46. Although the sound controller 230 as a sound control section will be described as being built into the production control board 30, the sound control section may use a sound source IC separate from the production control board 30.
In addition, the effect control board 30 includes a lamp driver section 45d that functions as a light display control section for a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, and a movable object motor that operates a movable object (not shown). A motor driver section 80d (motor drive circuit) functioning as a drive control section for 80c is connected. The production control board 30 instructs the lamp driver section 45d and the motor driver section 80d to control the light display operation by the optical display device 45a and the operation of the movable accessory motor 80c.

The production control board 30 is also connected to an origin switch 81 and a position detection sensor 82 for monitoring the operation of the movable accessory.
The origin switch 81 is composed of, for example, a photo interrupter, and detects whether or not the movable accessory motor 80c is at the origin position. The origin position is, for example, a position where the movable body is not normally exposed on the board surface in FIG. 2. The performance control board 30 is capable of determining whether or not the movable accessory motor 80c is at the origin position based on the detection information of the origin switch 81.
Further, the performance control board 30 controls the operation mode of the movable accessory while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82. Furthermore, the performance control board 30 monitors malfunctions in the operation of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82, and if any malfunctions occur, they are detected as errors.

Further, to the production control board 30, switches for the production button 13, the cross key 15a, and the decision button 15b shown as the operation unit 17 in the figure, that is, the operation detection switches for the production button 13, the cross key 15a, and the decision button 15b are connected, The performance control board 30 is capable of receiving operation detection signals from the performance button 13, cross key 15a, and determination button 15b, respectively.

Furthermore, the performance control board 30 is provided with a handle sensor 83 (touch sensor) for detecting whether or not the firing operation handle 15 shown in FIG. 1 is being touched by a user such as a player. The production control board 30 is capable of determining whether or not the firing operation handle 15 is touched by the user based on the detection information of the handle sensor 83.

Based on the performance control command sent from the main control unit 20, the performance control board 30 selects (determines) a performance pattern by lottery or uniquely from among multiple types of performance patterns prepared in advance, and selects (determines) a performance pattern uniquely from a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance. Various presentation means are controlled at the right timing to bring out the desired presentation. As a result, it is possible to display a performance image on the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the performance pattern, play sound from the speaker 46, and drive the decorative lamps 45 and LEDs to turn on and off. A ``performance scenario'' in a broad sense is realized by chronologically unfolding the preview performances, etc.).

Here, regarding the production control command, the production control board 30 (production control CPU 30a) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (main control CPU 20a), and receives and analyzes the command. conduct. Specifically, the production control CPU 30a executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the input of the strobe signal described above, acquires the production control command in the interrupt processing realized thereby, and reads the command content. Perform analysis.
At this time, if an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, even if an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process that is executed periodically) is being executed, The command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the processing, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interrupt processing is performed with priority.

<3. Overview of operation>
[3.1 Symbol variation display game]
Next, an overview of the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration as described above (FIG. 3) will be explained.
First, the symbol variation display game will be explained.

(Special symbol fluctuation display game)
In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, a game ball enters the starting hole 34 or the starting hole 35 (winning), the main control board 20 generates a random number. A "jackpot lottery" will be held. The main control board 20 starts a special symbol variation display game by variably displaying special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b based on the lottery results, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, The symbols are derived and displayed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the starting slot 34 and the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the starting slot 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result regarding the starting opening 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result regarding the starting opening 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that the game ball enters the starting port 34, the first special symbol variable display game is started by displaying the special symbol 1 in a variable manner, and the other side On the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball enters the starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and a second special symbol variable display game is started. . Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is "jackpot", a predetermined "jackpot" is displayed. In other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "miss" manner, thereby deriving the game result (jackpot lottery result).

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol fluctuation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol fluctuation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol fluctuation display game 1". The variable display game will be referred to as "special symbol variable display game 2." In addition, unless otherwise necessary, "Special Symbol 1" and "Special Symbol 2" will simply be referred to as "Special Symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "Special Symbol"), and "Special Symbol Variation Display Game 1" and ""Special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game."

(Decorative pattern variable display game)
Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (ornamental game symbols) on the main liquid crystal display device 36M. Various performances will be held in conjunction with the event. When the special symbol variable display game ends, the decorative symbol variable display game also ends, a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result is displayed on the special symbol display device, and the jackpot lottery result is reflected on the main liquid crystal display device 36M. The decorative patterns that have been created are now derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by a decorative symbol variation display game that includes a decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is a "jackpot" (when the jackpot lottery result is a "jackpot"), an effect that reflects the result is developed in the decorative symbol variation display game. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (for example, 7 segments is displayed as "7"), "left", "middle", " In each display area of ``Right'', the decorative pattern reflects the ``jackpot'' (for example, in each display area of ``Left'', ``Middle'', and ``Right'', 3 decorative patterns are displayed as ``7'', ``7'', and ``7''). 7" display state).

When this "jackpot" occurs, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "jackpot" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the big winning hole solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 is activated and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the big winning hole 50, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. A special game state (jackpot game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening door 52b allows the jackpot to be opened until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot (big jack 50 winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winning balls: the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one activation of the accessory: for example, 9) A "round game" in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the winning area is reached, and the big winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is met, is played for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, up to 16 rounds). round) repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening performance is first performed to notify that the jackpot has started, and after the opening performance ends, a round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. After the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending effect is performed to notify that the jackpot has ended, thereby ending the jackpot game.

Regarding the information necessary to execute the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control board 20 determines whether the game ball has entered the starting hole 34 or the starting hole 35 (winning). A 'winning/losing lottery' in which a "big hit" or a "miss" is determined on the condition that a game ball is detected by the mouth sensor 34a or the starting mouth sensor 35a and a starting condition (starting condition regarding a special symbol) is established. (Win/Fail Type Lottery)' and 'Symbol Lottery (Win Type (Win Type) Lottery)' which draws the jackpot type if it is a 'jackpot', or the losing type if it is a 'loss'. A jackpot lottery is carried out (if there is only one type of lottery, the lottery can be omitted as there is no need to perform a type lottery for the winners), and based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the winning type are determined. Accordingly, a special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "special stop symbol") is determined.

Then, the main control board 20 sends a "variation pattern designation command" that includes at least special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information regarding the jackpot lottery result and special symbol variation time, etc.) as an effect control command that specifies the processing state. It is transmitted to the production control board 30 side. As a result, basic information required for the decorative symbol variable display game is sent to the performance control board 30. In this embodiment, in order to provide a rich variety of performances, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on special stop symbols (symbol lottery result information (information regarding hit type)) is also transmitted to the performance control board 30. It looks like this.

The above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information can include information specifying whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, a "reach effect" or a "pseudo-continuous effect" to be described later) will occur. To be more specific, the special symbol variation patterns are roughly divided into a "winning variation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss variation pattern" in the case of a loss, depending on the jackpot lottery result. These fluctuation patterns include, for example, a 'reach fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of a reach effect, which will be described later, a 'normal fluctuation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect, and the occurrence (overlapping occurrence) of a pseudo-continuous effect and a reach effect. A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a ``reach variation pattern with pseudo-coupling'' that specifies, and a ``normal variation pattern with pseudo-coupling'' that specifies the occurrence of a pseudo-coupling effect but not specifying the occurrence of a reach effect. In addition, in order to secure the production time for the ready-to-reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation time is usually set longer for the variation pattern that specifies the ready-to-reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect than for the normal variation pattern.

The production control board 30 performs chronological display during the decorative pattern variation display game based on information included in the production control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 20. The content of the performance to be developed (performance scenario such as a preview performance) and the decorative pattern to be finally displayed (decorative stop pattern) are determined, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. A symbol variation display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 36M are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are changed. The middle period has substantially the same time width. Furthermore, the effect control board 30 controls the main liquid crystal display device 36M, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, in accordance with the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of images (image production) on the main liquid crystal display device 36M, the reproduction of sound effects (sound production), and the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamps 45, LEDs, etc. (light production) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decorative symbol variation display game. , these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise necessary.

(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), an "assistance winning lottery" is performed by a random number lottery on the main control board 20. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol fluctuation display game is started by displaying the normal symbols represented by the LEDs in a variable manner on the composite display device 38d, and after a certain period of time has elapsed, the result is displayed in a combination of LED lighting and non-lighting. It is designed to stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assistance win", the display section of the normal symbol of the composite display device 38d is set to a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lit, or "○" Among the LEDs representing "X" and "X", the LED on the "O" side is lit (in a lit state).

When this "assistance hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see Fig. 3) is activated, which causes the movable blade 47 to open in an inverted "C" shape and the starting port 35 to open or The enlarged game balls enter a state where it is easy to flow in (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal power open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this normal power release game, the movable wing pieces 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 are used until the opening time of the starting port 35 has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) or the number of game balls that have entered the starting port 35. The winning area is opened or expanded until the winning area reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces), and when any of these conditions is met, the starting port 35 is closed. It's about to be repeated.

(About suspension)
Here, in this embodiment, during a special/decorative symbol fluctuation display game, during a normal symbol fluctuation display game, during a jackpot game, or during a normal power release game, winning is won in the starting hole 34, the starting hole 35, or the normal symbol starting hole 37. If this occurs, that is, if a detection signal is input from the starting port sensor 34a, starting port sensor 35a, or normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is established, this will be displayed in a variable manner. Data related to the right to start a game, excluding data related to variable display, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, which is the maximum number of stored data (for example, a maximum of 4). The pending pending data that has not been subjected to this symbol variation display operation, or the game ball related to the pending data, is also referred to as an "operation pending ball." In order to make it clear to the player the number of balls on hold, a dedicated hold display (not shown) provided at a suitable location on the gaming machine 1 or a liquid crystal display device 36 (main liquid crystal display device 36M or sub-liquid crystal display device 36S) lights up the hold indicator provided as an icon image on the screen.

In addition, in this embodiment, up to four operation-reserved balls related to the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the main control RAM 20c, and are reserved as the number of confirmed fluctuations of the special symbol or the normal symbol. do. In addition, the maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) regarding the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or a part of the maximum number of reserved storage numbers for each symbol may be different, and the number can be determined as appropriate depending on the gaming nature.

[3.2 Game status]
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, various game states will first be explained.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of gaming states: a normal state, a time saving state, a potential state, and a variable probability state. These game states are distinguished by the jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state), the presence or absence of the electric chew support state (bonus game) (with electric support, without electric support), etc.

"Electric Chew Support State" means that the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 in the normal electricity open game (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of openings thereof) is in the normal state. Refers to the ``open extension state'' that is extended beyond the . When the open extension state occurs, the opening operation period of the movable blade 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds in the normal time (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of opening and closing operations is increased, for example, This will be extended from the usual one time to two or three times.

In the case of this embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the lottery probability of winning the support changes from a low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) of the predetermined probability (normal probability). At the same time, a 'normal symbol time reduction state' occurs that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol variable display operation time) (for example, from 10 seconds (reduced to 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the normal power release game occurs frequently, resulting in an operation rate improved state (high base state) in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under electric support support will be abbreviated as "with electric support", and the case without electric support will be abbreviated as "without electric support".

In this embodiment, the "normal state" means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of the predetermined probability (normal probability), and the gaming state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

"Time-saving state" means that the jackpot lottery probability is as low as in the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol fluctuation display operation time) is longer than the normal state. It refers to a gaming state in which a 'special symbol time saving state' in which the time is shortened also occurs and the electric chew support state occurs. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + electric support available + special symbol time saving state".

"Potential probability state" is a 'special symbol probability variable state' in which the jackpot lottery probability has changed to a high probability (for example, 1 in 39.9) that is higher than the low probability mentioned above, and a gaming state without electric support (high probability state). probability + no electric support).

The "variable probability state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the probability state, but a special symbol time saving state and an electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the probability change state, it becomes "high probability + electric support available + special symbol time saving state".

Regarding the gaming state, if we focus on the jackpot lottery probability, if the gaming state is "normal state" or "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability will be "low probability state", and if the gaming state is "potential state" or "probable variable state" If the state is 'state', at least the jackpot lottery probability is 'high probability state'. During the jackpot, a jackpot game in which the jackpot is opened and closed occurs, but the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support are the same as the normal state, with a low probability and no electric support.

[3.3 About winning]
Next, "winning" in the gaming machine 1 will be explained.
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a jackpot lottery (win lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of wins. In the case of this example, the winning types include each jackpot belonging to the jackpot types, such as "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probable variable 6R", and "probable variable 10R".
Note that the above notation "R" means the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for playing a round game, and a specific combination of special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. This refers to something that activates when passing through a specific area within the grand prize opening.

The above probability variable state ends the high probability state and shifts to a low probability state when the special symbol variation display game has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the specified ST number) without winning the jackpot type. This is a so-called "time-limiting definite change machine (ST machine)", and when the specified ST number ends, the game returns to the normal state from the next game. However, it may also be a "general probability changing machine" that continues until the next jackpot is won.

The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2), It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Furthermore, the number of time-saving states is not limited to 60 or 100, but can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. Furthermore, there is no particular restriction on what kind of hit to provide, and it can be determined as appropriate.

Here, in this example, there are a plurality of types of "losses" as well as jackpot types. Specifically, three types of deviations are provided: "missing 1", "missing 2", and "missing 3".
As described above, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is "losing", a lottery of the losing type is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3.4 About the performance]
(Production mode)
Next, the performance mode (performance state) will be explained. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of performance modes for presenting performances related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to switch between the performance modes. Specifically, a normal performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, a probability performance mode, and a probability variable performance mode are provided, each corresponding to a normal state, a time-saving state, a probability state, and a probability-variable state. In each production mode, the background display as the background of the fluctuating display screen of decorative symbols is displayed with a different background effect, so that the player can understand what kind of gaming state he or she is currently in. It has become.

The performance control board 30 (performance control CPU 30a) has a functional unit (performance state transition control means) that controls transition between multiple types of performance modes. The performance control board 30 (performance control CPU 30a) includes specific performance control commands sent from the main control board 20 (main control CPU 20a), specifically, game state information managed on the main control board 20 side. Based on the performance control command, the current game state is grasped in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed on the main control board 20 side, and it is configured to be able to control transition between a plurality of types of performance modes. Examples of the above-mentioned specific performance control commands include a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, and a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state.

(Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be explained. The performance control board 30 executes various operations related to the current performance mode and the jackpot lottery result based on the contents of the performance control command from the main control board 20, specifically, at least the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of "notice effects". This kind of preview performance is used as a "stimulation performance" to suggest (notice) the level of expectation as to whether or not the winning type has been won (hereinafter referred to as "win expectation level"), and to arouse the player's expectation of winning. work. Typical preview performances include "reach performance,""pseudo-continuationperformance," and even "pre-read preview performance." The performance control board 30 functions as a preview performance control means that can control the execution (appearance) of these performances.

"Reach effect" refers to a performance mode that involves a reach state (fluctuating display mode that involves a reach state: reach variation pattern), and specifically, a method that derives and displays the final game result via a reach state. It refers to the style of performance. The reach effects include multiple types of reach effects associated with the degree of expectation of winning. For example, there are cases where the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect appears. This kind of reach performance is called ``super reach performance.'' Many of these "super reaches" have a relatively longer production time (fluctuating time) than normal reaches in order to stimulate expectations of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, Super Reach includes multiple types of reach effects such as Super Reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of Super Reach 1 to 4 is expressed as "Super Reach 1 < Super Reach 2 < Super Reach". The relationship is “Reach 3 < Super Reach 4”.

"Pseudo-continuous performance" refers to a performance mode that involves a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo-continuous variation) of decorative symbols. It refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation is repeated one or more times, in which a part or all of a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative pattern is re-variably displayed from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "pre-read preview performance (continuous preview performance)" which is developed over multiple symbol change display games. Basically, the occurrence rate (appearance rate) of such "pseudo-links" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning.For example, depending on the number of pseudo fluctuations, It is made easier to select performances to arouse expectations such as reach.

"Pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "pre-reading notice" or "pre-reading effect") is, based on the result of pre-reading judgment, before the fluctuation display of the target symbol is performed. It means an effect that alerts you to the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. Note that "advantageous state" means a state advantageous to the player.
Specifically, the look-ahead performance in this example mainly displays pending balls (unexploited pending balls) that have not yet been used for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of special symbols). It is performed in a presentation manner that can notify the winning expectation in advance before the operation pending ball is used in the symbol variation display game, using the pattern and background effects of the symbol variation display game to be executed first. . In addition, in the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", there are various effects such as the so-called "SU (step up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "resurrection effect", and "premier notice effect". It occurs and is designed to liven up the game content.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the "suspended change notice performance" as an example of the above-mentioned pre-read notice performance will be described.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper display area of the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 36M includes a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variable display game (a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variable display effect and a preview effect). In addition, the display area on the lower side of the screen includes a hold display area 76 (hold display areas a1 to d1) that displays the number of active hold balls on the special symbol 1 side and a special hold display area 76 (hold display areas a1 to d1). A reservation display area 77 (reservation display parts a2 to d2) that displays the number of activated reservation balls on the symbol 2 side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of an operation pending ball, this fact is notified by a predetermined pending display mode. In Fig. 5, the presence or absence of an operation-holding bulb is shown in the lighted state (with an operation-holding bulb: "○ (white circle mark)" shown in the figure) or in the off state (no operation-holding ball: a broken-line circle shown in the figure). An example is shown in which information regarding the number of pending pitches is reported.

Displays regarding the presence or absence of pending action balls (pending display) are displayed in order of occurrence (order of winning), and in each pending display area 76, 77, the leftmost action pending ball indicates that all actions in the pending display are displayed. It is displayed as the activated suspended ball that occurred first (that is, the oldest) among the suspended balls on the time axis. Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, a fluctuating display area 78 is provided to show the activated holding balls that are currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of the present embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which an icon of a game currently being played pending K is displayed on top of the icon of the catch J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending a1 or a2 displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is changed to the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the catch J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When a pending ball occurs, the main control board 20 sends the pre-read judgment information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of pending balls at the time of the pre-read judgment (the current number of pending balls, including the currently held ball) A "pending addition command" specifying this is sent to the production control board 30 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 28).
In the case of this embodiment, the pending addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the pending addition command includes data on the upper byte side that makes it possible to specify the number of active pending balls at the time of look-ahead judgment, and the look-ahead judgment information. It consists of lower byte side data.

Here, as understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, based on the occurrence of a winning in the starting hole 34 or the starting hole 35 and a new held ball, a pre-reading determination regarding the held ball is performed. , a jackpot lottery is held for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball. As will be described later, the main control board 20 holds and stores information representing the result of the jackpot lottery conducted as such a pre-read determination in the corresponding storage area of the main control RAM 20c.
The information on the jackpot lottery result obtained during the pre-reading determination is used to select (lottery) a symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation display game, and can be referred to as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control board 20 performs a pre-read determination and stores the resulting "variation pattern selection information" in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.

When the effect control board 30 receives the above-mentioned pending addition command transmitted by the main control board 20, based on the pre-read judgment information included therein, the effect control board 30 performs a "pre-read preview effect" as part of the display control process related to the above-mentioned pending display. Performs production control processing related to. Specifically, a "pre-read preview lottery" is held to determine whether or not the pre-read preview performance can be executed, and if the lottery is won, the pre-read preview performance is made to appear.

Here, the look-ahead determination information specifically refers to the jackpot lottery result (jackpot lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation-reserved ball is used in the symbol fluctuation display game in the main control board 20; This is game information obtained by pre-reading and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. In other words, this information includes at least information that pre-reads and determines the winning/losing lottery results at the start of fluctuation (pre-read winning/losing information), and also includes information that pre-reads and determines the symbol lottery results (pre-read symbol information) and fluctuations at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to include information on which a pattern has been pre-read and determined (pre-read variation pattern information). What kind of information to send the pending addition command to the production control board 30 can be determined as appropriate depending on the content to be notified in the advance notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the pending addition command includes pre-read win/loss information, pre-read symbol information, and pre-read variation pattern information.

In addition, the "pre-read fluctuation pattern" obtained by the pre-read judgment when the action-holding ball occurs does not necessarily have to be the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the action-holding ball is actually subjected to the fluctuation display operation. There isn't. For example, to describe a typical case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "Super Reach 1", in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach 1". Rather than specifying the type of reach performance itself, it is possible to specify the essential "super reach type".

In the case of the present embodiment, if you win the pre-read preview lottery, the pending icon that is the target of the pre-read preview among the pending icons in the pending display areas a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 will be displayed as a normal hold display, for example. "Pending display change" that can change from white (normal pending display mode) to a pending display (special pending display mode) with blue, green, red, and danger patterns (or special colors and patterns such as rainbow colors) for advance notice. A pre-read preview performance (also referred to as a "pending change notice") of "Kei" will be performed.
FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched operation reservation sphere of the reservation display section b1 has changed to a special reservation display. Here, the display of the pending icon in blue, green, red, and danger pattern means that the expectation of winning is high in this order.In particular, the display of the pending icon with the danger pattern indicates that the expectation of winning the jackpot is extremely high. It is said to be a premium hold icon that will be displayed.

(Direction means)
Various effects on the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine 1. This presentation means may be any stimulus transmission means that can produce a presentation effect by appealing to human senses such as visual, auditory, and tactile senses, and may be a light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device (light display device 45a: light production means), sound generation devices such as the speaker 46 (sound production device 46a: sound production means), production display devices (display means) such as the main liquid crystal display device 36M and the sub liquid crystal display device 36S, and contact with the operator's body. Typical examples include a pressure device that transmits pressure, a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable accessory that produces a visual performance effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a visually appealing display device like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays effects by displaying images, and devices that express effects by other than images, such as a 7-segment display, are included in the concept of effect display device.

<4. Opening/closing structure and board arrangement>

The configuration of FIG. 3 described above is actually realized via a plurality of substrates. Below, some of the boards mounted on the gaming machine 1 will be selected and their arrangement will be explained. The opening/closing structure of the gaming machine 1 will also be explained for the mounting position of the board.

FIG. 5 shows the door 6 in an open state.
When the door 6 is opened, the inner frame 2 and the game board 3 attached to the inner frame 2 are directly exposed.
Note that a wiring connection is made between the substrate placed on the door 6 and the substrate placed on the inner frame 2 by a harness serving as a transmission line H8.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is configured so that the inner frame 2 can be opened relative to the outer frame 4.
FIG. 6 shows the inner frame 2 in an open state. When the inner frame 2 is opened, the game board 3 attached to the inner frame 2 is also released from the outer frame 4. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the back cover 18 attached to the back side of the game board 3 is visible. Although the game board 3 is not shown in FIG. 6, when the back cover 18 is removed (opened), the back side of the game board 3 is exposed. In fact, since the back cover 18 is transparent or semi-transparent, the back side of the game board 3 can be seen in the state shown in FIG.
Note that the game board 3 can be further removed from the inner frame 2.

In this way, the game machine 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 4, an inner frame 2 attached to the outer frame 4, a game board 3 attached to the inner frame 2, and a front side of the game board 3 and the inner frame 2. It is composed of a door 6 located. Various boards are attached to either the game board 3, the inner frame 2, or the door 6.

FIG. 7 shows the positions of some of the boards attached to the game board 3. Note that FIG. 7 shows the board mounted on the back side of the game area 3a when the game board 3 is viewed from the back side. Therefore, the right side in the figure is the left side when the game board 3 is viewed from the front side. In the figure, the outline of the frame of the game board 3 is shown with a dashed-dotted line as a guide for the position.

As shown in the figure, on the back side of the game board 3, an effect control board 30 is arranged slightly above the center, and a main control board 20 is arranged below it. Further, a liquid crystal control board 901 is arranged so as to overlap the production control board 30, and a ROM board 902 and a liquid crystal interface board 903 are arranged in the vicinity thereof.

An LED connection board 700 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the game board 3, and a power module board 904 is arranged near the top thereof.
Further, an upper connection board 905 is arranged above the game board 3.

Near the main control board 20, a relay board 760, a decorative board 740, a back left relay board 720, a game board connection board 906, a back bottom relay board 800, and a frame LED relay board 840 are arranged.

Further, as substrates attached to a movable accessory (not shown) attached to the game board, there are LED substrates 780, 790 and a decorative substrate 820.

FIG. 8 shows the positions of some of the boards attached to the door 6 as seen from the front side of the gaming machine 1. As for the internal structure of the gaming machine 1, the door 6, the production button 13, the firing operation handle 15, and the upper speaker 46 are shown with dashed lines for positional reference.

A relay board 550 is provided above the door 6.
Similarly, a side unit upper LED board 630 is provided above the door 6, a side unit upper right LED board 600 is provided at the upper right of the door 6, and a side unit lower right LED board 620 is provided below it. Note that these side unit upper right LED board 600, side unit lower right LED board 620, and side unit upper LED board 630 are installed inside the side unit 10 (see FIG. 1), and each board When installed, the position shown in FIG. 8 is achieved.

A frame left LED board 907 is arranged at the upper left side of the door 6, and a frame lower left LED board 908 is arranged below it.
Further, a front frame LED connection board 500 is arranged below the door 6.
Further, a button LED connection board 640 is arranged at the lower right, and a button LED board 660 is arranged inside the production button 13.

Next, the position of the board attached to the inner frame 2 will be explained. FIG. 9 is a diagram of the gaming machine 1 viewed from the back. Most of the back side of the gaming machine 1 is protected by a transparent or translucent back cover 18.
Below this rear side, a power supply board 300 and a payout control board 29 are arranged front and back.
Furthermore, an inner frame LED relay board 400 is attached to the lower right side when viewed from the back side.

FIG. 10 shows the positions of various devices placed on the door 6 and the game board 3. The outlines of the game board 3 and the door 6 are shown with dashed lines as a guide for the position of each device.

In FIG. 10, the devices provided in the side unit 10 of the door 6 include a side unit device 101, a side unit lower right movable part position detection switch 102, a side unit lower right movable part motor 103, and a side unit upper right movable part motor 104. , a side unit upper right movable solenoid 105, a blower 106, and photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are arranged at the positions shown, respectively. Photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are attached to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.

In FIG. 10, the devices attached to the game board 3 include a lower back movable object upper position detection switch 120, a lower back movable object right position detection switch 121, a sorting position detection switch 122, a lower front movable object position detection switch 123, Front movable object motor 124, lower back movable object left position detection switch 125, lower back movable object left motor 126, lower back movable object lower right position detection switch 127, lower back movable object lower left position detection switch 128, upper back movable object left The motor 129, the upper movable object left position detection switch 130, the left movable object motor 131, the upper movable object position detection switch 132, the upper movable object right motor 133, the left movable object position detection switch 134, and the lower back movable object right motor 135. Each is placed at the position shown in the figure.

Note that the boards shown in FIGS. 7, 8, and 9 above are only part of the boards provided in the gaming machine 1. In particular, it illustrates the main substrates that will be the subject of the following explanation.
Furthermore, the devices shown in FIG. 10 are only some of the devices provided in the gaming machine 1.

<5. Board connection configuration>
[5.1 Connection status of each board]

The connection configuration of each board arranged as described above will be explained, and the supply route of the power supply voltage will be mentioned.

FIG. 11 shows an example of boards arranged on the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6, respectively.
In this case, the boards mounted on the game board 3 include the main control board 20, the performance control board 30, the frame LED relay board 840, the LED connection board 700, the board back left relay board 720, the decoration board 740, the relay board 760, and the LED. A board 780, an LED board 790, a lower board relay board 800, and a decorative board 820 are shown.
As the boards mounted on the inner frame 2, a power supply board 300, a payout control board 29, and an inner frame LED relay board 400 are shown.
The boards mounted on the door 6 include a front frame LED connection board 500, a relay board 550, a side unit upper right LED board 600, a side unit lower right LED board 620, a side unit upper LED board 630, a button LED connection board 640, and a button. An LED board 660 is shown.

Each of these boards is a part of the board mounted on the game machine 1, and there are various boards mounted on the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6 other than those shown in the drawings. This FIG. 11 shows a connection system of selected boards for use in explaining the technology as an embodiment of the present invention, and does not show all the boards.

The power supply board 300 is a board that supplies DC voltage as an operating power source to each part based on an AC input power supply.
The main control board 20, production control board 30, and payout control board 29 are as described in FIG. 3.

The front frame LED connection board 500 is a board for supplying operation control signals and power supply voltage to the LED provided on the door 6, the motor of the movable body, the solenoid, the blower, and other performance means.

The upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit, and the upper LED board 630 of the side unit are boards disposed within the side unit 10, and constitute a drive control system for the mode of the LEDs and movable objects. These boards also constitute a detection system that transmits detection signals from the motor position sensor, touch sensor, and other various sensors to the production control board 30.
As described above, the side unit 10 is attached to the door 6 as one of the decorative units, and the side unit 10 is detachable from the door 6 and can be replaced. The upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit, and the upper LED board 630 of the side unit are attached and detached together with the side unit 10.
When the side unit 10 is attached and the relay board 550 and the transmission line H10 of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are connected, the electrical configuration shown in FIG. 11 is obtained.

The button LED board 660 constitutes the LED in the performance button 13 and its light emitting drive system, and also constitutes a circuit that transfers detection signals from various detection sensors.
The button LED connection board 640 relays control signals and power supply voltage to the button LED board 660, and also transfers detection signals from various sensors.

The inner frame LED relay board 400 relays between the frame LED relay board 840 connected to the production control board 30 and the front frame LED connection board 500, performs necessary signal processing, and also generates and supplies power supply voltage. .
The frame LED relay board 840 relays a signal path between the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the production control board 30.

The LED boards 780 and 790 are mounted with LEDs in the game board 3 and drive the LEDs to emit light. The relay board 760 relays the LED light emission drive signal. These LED boards 780, 790 and relay board 760 are attached to a movable accessory.
The decorative board 740 serves as a relay and drives other LED boards.
The back left relay board 720 performs relay.
The decorative board 820 is equipped with LEDs.
The board back lower relay board 800 performs relaying.
The LED connection board 700 performs various necessary signal processing for driving light emission of performance means such as LEDs and motors based on control signals from the performance control board 30.

These respective boards are electrically connected by a transmission line H using a harness and a cable. "Transmission line H" is a general term for the illustrated transmission lines H1, H2, . . . H31.
In each transmission line H, each wiring path for transmitting signals, power supply voltage, etc. is also simply referred to as a "line."
The transmission line H refers to one or a set of multiple lines.
The transmission line H includes various forms such as a flexible harness, a flexible substrate, and a wire harness. Further, the transmission line H may be one in which a plurality of lines are integrated, or may be one in which individual lines are held together with a binder, tape, or the like.
Further, when the connectors are directly connected to each other, the terminals of each connector become the transmission line H. In other words, even if a wire such as a harness does not exist, it is included in the "transmission line H".
That is, the transmission line H does not refer to a specific type or shape, but broadly refers to a line that forms electrical wiring between substrates or the like.

The power supply board 300 and the payout control board 29 are connected by a transmission line H1.
Further, the power supply board 300 and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are connected by a transmission line H3.
These transmission lines H1 and H3 are formed by harnesses or the like arranged within the inner frame 2.

The power supply board 300 and the production control board 30 are connected by a transmission line H2.
The payout control board 29 and the main control board 20 are connected by a transmission line H4.
The inner frame LED relay board 400 and the frame LED relay board 840 are connected by a transmission line H7.
These transmission lines H2, H4, and H7 are formed by harnesses or the like that straddle and connect between the inner frame 2 and the game board 3.

The main control board 20 and the production control board 30 are connected by a transmission line H5.
The production control board 30 and the frame LED relay board 840 are connected by a transmission line H6.
The production control board 30 and the LED connection board 700 are connected by a transmission line H20.
The LED connection board 700 and the back left relay board 720 are connected by a transmission line H21.
The back left relay board 720 and the decorative board 740 are connected by a transmission line H22.
The decorative board 740 and the relay board 760 are connected by a transmission line H23. It is conceivable that the transmission line H23 is a flexible cable for connection to the relay board 760 attached to the movable accessory.
The relay board 760 and the LED board 780 are connected by a transmission line H24.
The LED board 780 and the LED board 790 are connected by a transmission line H25.
The LED connection board 700 and the bottom relay board 800 are connected by a transmission line H30.
The lower relay board 800 and the decorative board 820 are connected by a transmission line H31.
These transmission lines H5, H6, H20, H21, H22, H23, H24, H25, H30, and H31 are formed by harnesses arranged within the game board 3.

The inner frame LED relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500 are connected by a transmission line H8.
This transmission line H8 is formed by a harness or the like that straddles and connects between the inner frame 2 and the door 6.

The front frame LED connection board 500 and the relay board 550 are connected by a transmission line H9.
The relay board 550 and the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are connected by a transmission line H10.
The side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit lower right LED board 620 are connected by a transmission line H11.
The upper right LED board 600 of the side unit and the upper LED board 630 of the side unit are connected by a transmission line H12.
The front frame LED connection board 500 and the button LED connection board 640 are connected by a transmission line H15.
The button LED connection board 640 and the button LED board 660 are connected by a transmission line H16.
These transmission lines H9, H10, H11, H12, H15, and H16 are formed by harnesses or the like arranged inside the door 6.

The power supply board 300 supplies power supply voltage to each part through transmission lines H1, H2, and H3.
FIG. 12 shows the power supply system input/output for the power supply board 300.
The power supply board 300 is equipped with connectors CN1A to CN7A.
Transmission line ends of transmission lines H40, H41, and H42, which are not shown in FIG. 11, are connected to the connectors CN5A, CN6A, and CN7A.

Hereinafter, the connectors CN1A to CN7A, including connectors appearing in other figures, will be collectively referred to as "connector CN."
In this specification, "connector CN" refers to a connector terminal component provided on a board. The terminal portion formed at the end of the transmission line H for connector connection will be referred to as a "transmission line end."
"Connector CN" is connected to "transmission line end". Alternatively, the "connector CN" may be directly connected to another connector CN of a corresponding shape.

AC 24V power from the power plug 301 of the gaming machine 1 is supplied to the three-terminal connector CN5A through the transmission line H40 (AC-IN(A), AC-IN(B)).
Further, an FG (frame ground) path (FG) is formed via the ground terminal 302, the transmission line H40, and the connector CN5A. The ground terminal 302 is connected, for example, to the outside of the gaming machine main body.

A transmission line H41 is connected to the two-terminal connector CN6A, and an FG path (FG-1) via ground terminals 303 and 304 is formed. The ground terminals 303 and 304 are connected to, for example, the gaming machine main body.
A transmission line H42 is connected to the two-terminal connector CN7A, and an FG path (FG-2) via ground terminals 305 and 306 is formed. The ground terminals 305 and 306 are connected to, for example, the gaming machine main body.

A transmission line H1-1 is connected to the connector CN1A having a 14-terminal configuration. Further, a transmission line H1-1 is connected to the three-terminal connector CN4A. The transmission lines H1-1 and H1-2 as these two harnesses are shown as the transmission line H1 in FIG. 11 described above.
A 35V DC voltage (DC35VA), a 12V DC voltage (DC12VA), and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VA) are supplied to the payout control board 29 through the transmission line H1-1, and a ground path (GND) is formed.
Two systems of 24V DC voltage (DC24VA, DC24VB) are supplied to the payout control board 29 through the transmission line H1-2, and an FG path (FG) is formed.

35V DC voltage (DC35VA), 12V DC voltage (DC12VA), and 5V DC voltage (DC5VA) are supplied to the main control board 20 via the payout control board 29, and a ground path (GND) is formed. .

A transmission line H2 is connected to the connector CN2A having a 20-terminal configuration.
5V DC voltage (DC5VB), 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and 35V DC voltage (DC35VB) are supplied to the production control board 30 by the transmission line H2, and a ground path (GND) is formed.

Based on the power supply through the transmission line H2, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and 35V DC voltage (DC35VB) are supplied from the production control board 30 to the LED connection board 700, and the LED connection board 700 and each downstream board (back panel left relay board 720, panel back lower relay board 800, etc.) as an operating power source.
On the other hand, the frame LED relay board 840 is a board that simply has relay wiring and does not require a power supply voltage, and is not supplied with power voltage from the effect control board 30.

For the purpose of explanation, the expressions "upstream" and "downstream" are used, but in terms of data and control signals, the main control board 20 is the most upstream, followed by the production control board 30, and from the production control board 30 the actual signals such as LEDs and motors are ``downstream'' toward the production device.
Regarding the power supply voltage, the power supply board 300 is the most upstream, and it is assumed that it is "downstream" toward the actual performance device.

A transmission line H3 is connected to the six-terminal connector CN3A.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the inner frame LED relay board 400 through the transmission line H3, and a ground path (GND) is also formed.
In other words, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is a board controlled by the effect control board 30, but is configured to receive power supply voltage directly from the power supply board 300.
Each board (front frame LED connection board 500, etc.) provided on the door 6 downstream of the inner frame LED relay board 400 receives power supply voltage from the inner frame LED relay board 400.

[5.2 Inner frame LED relay board 400]

The circuit configurations of some of the boards shown in FIG. 11 will be described below. First, the inner frame LED relay board 400 will be explained using FIGS. 13 and 14.
13 and 14 separately show the circuit configuration provided on the inner frame LED relay board 400.

Connectors CN1B, CN2B, and CN3B shown in FIG. 13 and connector CN4B shown in FIG. 14 are mounted on the inner frame LED relay board 400.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H7 that connects the frame LED relay board 840 is connected to the connector CN1B.
The details of the frame LED relay board 840 will be omitted, but as described above, it is a board that simply has relay wiring. Therefore, the connector CN1B essentially forms wiring with the production control board 30 via the transmission line H7, the frame LED relay board 840, and the transmission line H6.

This connector CN1B has 28 terminals from the 1st pin to the 28th pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "28".
For convenience of explanation, the term "pin" of the connector CN does not refer only to pin-shaped male terminals, but also includes both male and female terminals, and also includes so-called planar contact patterns and corresponding It is also used to include terminals, etc.

The 1st pin, 3rd pin, 5th pin, 7th pin, 8th pin, 17th pin, and 18th pin are used as ground terminals. The second pin is assigned as a clock signal S_IN_CLK, the fourth pin is assigned as a load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin is assigned as a serial data signal S_IN_DATA terminal.

9th pin is clear signal CLR_L, 10th pin is clear signal CLR_M, 11th pin is clock signal CLK_L, 12th pin is clock signal CLK_M, 13th pin is data signal DATA_L, 14th pin is data signal DATA_M, 15th pin The pin is assigned as the enable signal ENABLE_L, and the 16th pin is assigned as the enable signal ENABLE_M.
The 19th to 28th pins are assigned to the + terminal and - terminal of the upper right speaker, middle right speaker, lower right speaker, upper left speaker, middle left speaker, and lower speaker as the speaker 46, respectively.

Here, the serial data signal S_IN_DATA is serial data received from the front frame LED connection board 500 and transmitted from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the production control board 30.
The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied from the production control board 30 to the inner frame LED relay board 400, and further sent to the front frame LED connection board 500. These are used for serial data transmission operation from the front frame LED connection board 500 on the downstream side.

Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, and enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M are signals used for drive control of the production device supplied from the production control board 30.
For example, the data signals DATA_L and DATA_M are light emission drive signals and motor drive signals that indicate the gradation of the LED, and the clear signals CLR_L and CLR_M, etc., the clock signals CLK_L and CLK_M, etc., and the enable signals ENABLE_L and ENABLE_M are the LED driver and motor drive signals. This is a signal for controlling the operation of the motor driver.
Note that "_L" at the end of the clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, etc. indicates a signal mainly used for controlling the operation of the LED, and "_M" indicates a signal mainly used for controlling the operation of the motor.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H8 that connects the front frame LED connection board 500 is connected to the connector CN2B.
This connector CN2B has 30 terminals from the 1st pin to the 30th pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "30".

The first pin and the third pin are terminals for a 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB).
Four pins from the 27th pin to the 30th pin are terminals for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 5th pin, the 7th pin, the 8th pin, the 17th pin, and the 18th pin are used as ground terminals.
Note that conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN2B are connected to ground. This is for the mounting strength of the connector. Conductor points P1 and P2 are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.
In all other illustrated connectors CN, the conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.

The second pin is assigned as a clock signal S_IN_CLK, the fourth pin is assigned as a load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin is assigned as a serial data signal S_IN_DATA terminal.
9th pin is clear signal CLR_L, 10th pin is clear signal CLR_M, 11th pin is clock signal CLK_L, 12th pin is clock signal CLK_M, 13th pin is data signal DATA_L, 14th pin is data signal DATA_M, 15th pin The pins are assigned as general-purpose output ports, and the 16th pin is assigned as each terminal of the enable signal ENABLE_M.
The 19th to 26th pins are assigned to the + and - terminals of the upper right speaker, middle right speaker, lower right speaker, upper left speaker, and middle left speaker, respectively, as shown in the figure.

The connector CN3B is a connector for connection to a lower speaker, which is one of the speakers 46 not shown in FIG. This connector CN3B has the first and second pins numbered "1" and "2" assigned to the + and - terminals of the lower speaker, and is connected to the 27th and 28th pins of the connector CN1B. .

The connector CN4B in FIG. 14 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H3 that connects with the power supply board 300, and is connected to the connector CN3A of the power supply board 300 shown in FIG. 12.
This connector CN4B has a six-terminal configuration from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "6", and is assigned in the same manner as the connector CN3A of the power supply board 300. That is, the first pin, the second pin, and the third pin are terminals to which 12V DC voltage (DC12VA) is supplied from the power supply board 300. The fourth pin, the fifth pin, and the sixth pin are used as ground terminals.

In this case, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is configured to input 12V DC voltage (DC12VA) from the first, second, and third pins to the voltage regulator 401 via the fuse F1B. A 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB) is obtained as an output. Capacitors C3B, C4B, C5B, and C6B are connected in parallel between the input terminal side of voltage regulator 401 and ground. A capacitor C7B and a resistor R24B are connected in parallel between the output terminal side of the voltage regulator 401 and the ground.
That is, a 5V generation section 410 is formed that generates a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VA).

From the first and third pins of the connector CN2B in FIG. 13, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated in the inner frame LED relay board 400 is supplied to the downstream board.
Note that the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied to the downstream board from the 27th pin to the 30th pin of the connector CN2B is supplied to the downstream board via the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd pins of the connector CN4B in Figure 14. This is the voltage supplied from the power supply board 300.

As shown in FIG. 13, buffer circuits 402 and 403 using ICs are arranged on the inner frame LED relay board 400.
As the buffer circuits 402 and 403, ICs are used that function as an inverter when the CONT terminal of the first pin is at L level, and as a buffer when it is at H level. It functions as a buffer.
Further, as an operating power supply, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is applied to the 20th pin VCC terminal.

The buffer circuits 402 and 403 are Schmitt trigger buffers containing 8 CMOS circuits, and are buffers for signals input from the second pin (A1 terminal) to the ninth pin (A8 terminal), that is, signal compensation (deteriorated H/ (repair of the L signal waveform) and output from the 18th pin (Y1 terminal) to the 11th pin (Y8 terminal), respectively.
In other words, the signal input to the A1 terminal is buffered and output from the Y1 terminal, the signal input to the A2 terminal is buffered and output from the Y2 terminal,...the signal input to the A8 terminal is buffered. and output from the Y8 terminal.
Note that buffer processing refers to signal compensation processing using signal amplification, waveform shaping, etc., and since it mainly targets pulse signals as digital data, waveform shaping has a large meaning. Below, these processes will be referred to as "buffer processing", "signal compensation", etc.

The buffer circuit 402 performs signal compensation for the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.
The clock signal S_IN_CLK from the second pin of the connector CN1B is input to the A3 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y3 terminal, and supplied to the second pin of the connector CN2B.
The load signal S_IN_LOAD from the fourth pin of connector CN1B is input to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y1 terminal, and supplied to the fourth pin of connector CN2B.
The serial data signal S_IN_DATA input from the downstream side to the sixth pin of the connector CN2B is input to the A5 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y5 terminal, and supplied to the sixth pin of the connector CN1B.

The buffer circuit 402 also has a third pin (A2 terminal), a fifth pin (A4 terminal), a seventh pin (A6 terminal), an eighth pin (A7 terminal), a ninth pin (A8 terminal), and a tenth pin ( GND terminal) and the 19th pin (G￣ terminal) are connected to the ground. The 11th pin (Y8 terminal), 12th pin (Y7 terminal), 13th pin (Y6 terminal), 15th pin (Y4 terminal), and 17th pin (Y2 terminal) are open.

The buffer circuit 403 performs signal compensation for clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signal DATA_L, data signal DATA_M, the 15th pin performs signal compensation for the enable signal ENABLE_L, and the 16th pin performs signal compensation for the enable signal ENABLE_M.
Each of these signals inputted from the 9th pin to the 16th pin of the connector CN1B is inputted to one of the A1 terminals to the A8 terminals of the buffer circuit 402, and outputted from the Y1 terminal to Y8 terminal to the 1st pin of the connector CN2B. It is supplied to the 9th pin to the 16th pin.
Further, in the buffer circuit 403, the 10th pin (GND terminal) and the 19th pin (G terminal) are connected to the ground.

As described above, the inner frame LED relay board 400 has the following configuration.
- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD supplied from the production control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) to the connector CN1B are compensated by the buffer circuit 402 and transmitted to the downstream side by the connector CN2B.
- The serial data signal S_IN_DATA supplied from the downstream front frame LED connection board 500 to the connector CN2B is signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 402 and transmitted to the upstream side by the connector CN1B.
- Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, and enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M supplied from the production control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) to the connector CN1B are compensated by the buffer circuit 403. Then, it is transmitted to the downstream side via connector CN2B.

・Relay the audio signal to the speaker and send it directly to the downstream board or speaker unit.
- Power supply voltage is not supplied from the connector CN1B (transmission line H7) connected to the production control board 30 side (frame LED relay board 840).
- 12V DC voltage (DC12V) is received from the power supply board 300 through the connector CN4B, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the downstream side via the fuse F1B.
- Using 12V DC voltage (DC12V), generate 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) for use in the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the downstream side, and use it as an operating power source for the buffer circuits 402 and 403 and supply it to the downstream side.

In addition to those mentioned above, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, resistors R1B to R26B, resistors by chip resistors RA1B and RA2B, and capacitors C1B to C17B are connected at required locations. .
For example, for the clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, resistors R25B, R26B, R8B are connected to the input side (connector CN1B side). R9B, R10B, R11B, R12B, R13B, R14B, and R15B are inserted as damping resistors. Furthermore, resistors R3B and R2B and chip resistors RA1B and RA2B are inserted as damping resistors on the output side (connector CN2B side).
In this case, if the wiring distance between the connector and the damping resistor is LA, and the wiring distance between the damping resistor and the buffer circuits 402 and 403 is LB,
LA<LB
The relationship is In other words, the damping resistor is arranged closer to the connector (CN1B or CN2B) than the buffer circuits 402, 403. This improves signal noise reduction performance.

[5.3 Front frame LED connection board 500]

The front frame LED connection board 500 will be explained using FIGS. 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20. These figures separately show the circuit configuration provided on the front frame LED connection board 500.

The front frame LED connection board 500 has connectors CN2C, CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C shown in FIG. 15, connectors CN1C and CN4C shown in FIG. 16, connectors CN3C shown in FIG. 17, connectors CN7C and CN9C shown in FIG. 18, and connector CN10C shown in FIG. will be installed.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H8 that connects the connector CN2C of FIG. 15 with the connector CN2B of the inner frame LED relay board 400 of FIG. 13 is connected.
Therefore, this connector CN2C has a configuration of 30 terminals from the 1st pin to the 30th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "30", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN2B described above. Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN2C are also connected to ground. This is due to the mounting strength of the connector, and the conductor points P1 and P2 are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.
Although not mentioned again, conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, CN7C, CN8C, CN9C, and CN10C, which will be described later, are also connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

Connector CN5C is a connector for connection to the middle right speaker, which is one of the speakers 46. This connector CN3B has the 1st and 2nd pins numbered "1" and "2" assigned to the + and - terminals of the middle right speaker, and is connected to the 20th and 22nd pins of the connector CN2C. There is.

Connector CN6C is a connector for connection to the middle left speaker, which is one of the speakers 46. This connector CN6B has the 1st and 2nd pins numbered "1" and "2" assigned to the + and - terminals of the middle left speaker, and is connected to the 24th and 26th pins of the connector CN2C. There is.

Connector CN8C is a connector for connection with the upper right speaker and the upper left speaker, which are one of the speakers 46. This connector CN6B has the 1st and 2nd pins numbered "1" and "2" assigned to the + and - terminals of the upper right speaker, and is connected to the 19th and 21st pins of the connector CN2C. . Further, the third and fourth pins numbered "3" and "4" are assigned to the + and - terminals of the upper left speaker, and are connected to the 23rd and 25th pins of the connector CN2C.

Connector CN1C in FIG. 16 is a connector connected to an LED board not shown in FIG. 11.
The connector CN4C is also connected to an LED board inside the handle (not shown).

The connector CN1C has 13 terminals from the 1st pin to the 13th pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "13".
The 1st and 6th pins are ground terminals, the 2nd pin is a clock signal CLK terminal, the 3rd pin is a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) terminal, the 4th pin is a data signal DATA terminal, and the 5th pin is a reset signal RESET The 7th pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12V) terminal.

The 8th to 13th pins are R, G, and B LED light emission drive currents (17-R6, 17- G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) input terminal.
This LED light emitting drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) is directly passed from the 2nd pin to the 7th pin of the connector CN4C to another device (not shown). is supplied to the LED board inside the handle on the downstream side.

That is, on the downstream side of the front frame LED connection board 500, an LED board (not shown) and an LED board in the handle are connected by connectors CN1C and CN4C, and an LED driver is mounted on the LED board. The LED driver operates using the clock signal CLK, 5V DC voltage (DC5V), data signal DATA, reset signal RESET terminal, and 12V DC voltage (DC12V) from the connector CN1C, and drives the LED on the LED board. At the same time, LED light emission drive currents (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) for the LEDs on the LED board inside the handle are also generated. The LED light emitting drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) is supplied to the LED of the LED board inside the handle via the front frame LED connection board 500. That will happen.

In addition, each of the pins 2 to 7 of connector CN4C should be Zener diodes D8C to D15C are connected as a protection circuit.
Further, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to the first pin of the connector CN4C, and a power supply voltage is supplied to the LED board inside the handle (not shown).

Such a configuration is used to connect two LED boards downstream of the front frame LED connection board 500 and provide an LED driver only on one of them.
That is, the front frame LED connection board 500 outputs a clock signal CLK, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a data signal DATA, a reset signal RESET, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12V) for the operation of the LED driver. Then, the LED light emission drive current from the LED driver is returned and relayed to be sent to the other LED board.

In this case, only one LED driver is required to drive the two downstream LED boards. In particular, when controlling light emission using a common LED drive control signal, it is sufficient to transmit the LED drive control signal to only one LED board, which facilitates simplification of the wiring configuration. That is, it is not necessary to transmit the clock signal CLK, 5V DC voltage (DC5V), data signal DATA, reset signal RESET, and 12V DC voltage (DC12V) to both LED boards.
In addition, by relaying the LED light emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7), a harness that transmits these between two downstream LED boards can be created. No longer needed.

The connector CN3C in FIG. 17 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H9 that connects with the relay board 550 on the downstream side.
This connector CN3C has 22 terminals from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "22".

Five pins, the 1st pin, the 3rd pin, the 11th pin, the 13th pin, and the 18th pin, are used as ground terminals.
The second pin is a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) terminal.
Three pins, the 5th pin, the 7th pin, and the 9th pin, are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

The fourth pin is assigned as a serial data signal S_IN_DATAx, the sixth pin as a load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the eighth pin as a clock signal S_IN_CLK.

The 10th pin is an enable signal ENABLE_L, the 12th pin is a clear signal CLR_P, the 14th pin is a reset signal RESET_P, the 15th pin is a clock signal CLK_M, the 16th pin is a data signal DATA_P, the 17th pin is a reset signal RESET_M, the 19th The pins are assigned as data signal DATA_M, the 20th pin as drive general-purpose signal 1, the 21st pin as enable signal ENABLE_M, and the 22nd pin as drive general-purpose signal 2.

The connector CN7C in FIG. 18 is connected to a board (not shown) for detecting the cross key 15a, enter key 15b, volume button (not shown), light amount button, etc. This connector CN7C has a 9-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 9th pin indicated by "1" to "9", the 1st pin is the ground terminal, and each pin from the 2nd pin to the 9th pin has a cross key. Sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, which are detection signals for operations such as 15a, are input.
Note that the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 from the second pin to the ninth pin are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via chip resistors RA3C and RA4C.

The connector CN9C is connected to a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15. This connector CN9C has a two-terminal configuration indicated by "1" and "2", the first pin receives the sense signal SENS14 from the touch sensor, and the second pin is used as a ground terminal.
Note that the sense signal SENS14 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via a resistor R26C.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H15 connecting between the connector CN10C in FIG. 20 and the button LED connection board 640 in FIG. 11 is connected.
This connector CN10C has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin numbered "1" to "20".

Five pins, the second pin, the fourth pin, the 12th pin, the 13th pin, and the 19th pin, are used as ground terminals.
The 8th pin is a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) terminal.
The sixth pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal.
The fifth and seventh pins are terminals for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V).

The 1st pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ/2, the 3rd pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ/1, the 9th pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ2, the 10th pin is the motor drive signal DCMOT3, and the 11th pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ1. Assigned as a terminal.

The 14th pin is assigned as a clear signal CLR_L, the 16th pin is assigned as a clock signal CLK_L, and the 18th pin is assigned as a data signal DATA_L.
The 15th pin, the 17th pin, and the 20th pin are terminals into which sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11, which are detection signals from the downstream side, are input.
Note that the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via a chip resistor RA5C.

The power supply voltage at this front frame LED connection board 500 will be explained.
The front frame LED connection board 500 includes, as ICs, buffer circuits 501, 502, 503, 507, and 508, which are 8-circuit Schmitt trigger buffers similar to the buffer circuit 402 previously explained in FIG. 13, and triple buffer gates. Certain buffer circuits 504, 512, and 513 are installed.
As the power supply voltage for these, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) supplied from the first pin of connector CN2C is used.

Furthermore, as ICs, parallel/serial (hereinafter referred to as "P/S") conversion circuits 505 and 506 shown in FIG. ) is used.

Furthermore, the LED driver 509 shown in FIG. 19 is mounted as an IC, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 27th pin to the 30th pin of the connector CN2C is used as the power supply voltage for this.

Furthermore, motor drivers 510 and 511 shown in FIG. 19 are mounted as ICs, and these use a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) as power supply voltages.
The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is used as a power supply voltage for driving the motor, and the 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) is used as a power supply voltage for motor drivers such as motor drivers 510 and 511.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB). As shown in FIG. 15, a capacitor C11 is inserted between the 27th pin to the 30th pin of the connector CN2C and the ground, and the anode side of a Schottky barrier diode D18C is connected to the positive electrode side of the capacitor C11. There is. A resistor R27C, capacitors C12C and C13C, and a chip varistor 515 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D18C and the ground. With this configuration, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as a power supply voltage protected from overvoltage.
That is, a power separation/protection circuit 520 is formed that separates the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VA).

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using a power supply separation/protection circuit 521 shown in FIG. 19, which includes a diode D19C, a resistor R34C, and a capacitor C21C.

The flow of various signals in the front frame LED connection board 500 will be explained below.
Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose output port signal (general-purpose signal HANYOU), and enable signal ENABLE_M are transmitted from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to connector CN2C in FIG. It will be done.
Each of these signals is input to terminals A1 to A8 of the buffer circuit 501, and signal compensation is performed.
Note that the clear signals CLR_L and CLR_M supplied from the inner frame LED relay board 400 are shown as reset signals RESET_L and RESET_M in the front frame LED connection board 500.

The clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the reset signal RESET_L are signal-compensated in the buffer circuit 501 and then supplied to the buffer circuit 504 in FIG. 16 via the chip resistor RA1C. After being buffered, the signal is output from the connector CN1C to an LED board (not shown).

Furthermore, these clock signal CLK_L, general-purpose signal HANAYOU, data signal DATA_L, and reset signal RESET_L, which have been signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 in FIG. 15, are sent to the A5 terminal, A6 terminal, A7 terminal, and A8 terminal of the buffer circuit 502 in FIG. supplied to The signal-compensated outputs of the Y5, Y6, Y7, and Y8 terminals of the buffer circuit 502 are relayed from the connector CN3C as a clock signal CLK_P, an enable signal ENABLE_L (from the general-purpose signal HANYOU), a data signal DATA_P, and a reset signal RESET_P. It is output to the board 550.

In other words, to the downstream side after the relay board 550, signals for LED control etc. outputted from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 are transmitted after being signal compensated by the buffer circuits 501 and 502.

Note that the clock signal CLK_P is a constant voltage/protection circuit made up of a Zener diode D5C and a resistor R19C, the enable signal ENABLE_L is a constant voltage/protection circuit made up of a Zener diode D4C and a resistor R15C, and the data signal DATA_P is a constant voltage/protection circuit made up of a Zener diode D6C and a resistor R20C. The protection circuit and reset signal RESET_P are outputted from the connector CN3C via constant voltage/protection circuits each including a Zener diode D7C and a resistor R21C.

Further, the clock signal CLK_L, data signal DATA_L, and reset signal RESET_L whose signals have been compensated by the buffer circuit 501 in FIG. 15 are supplied to the buffer circuit 512 in FIG. 20. After being amplified, the signals are output from the connector CN10C to the button LED connection board 640 as a clock signal CLK_L, a data signal DATA_L, and a clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L).

Therefore, on the downstream side after the button LED connection board 640, signals for LED control etc. output from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 are transmitted after being signal compensated by the buffer circuits 501 and 512. Become.

Further, the clock signal CLK_L, data signal DATA_L, and general-purpose signal HANYOU_L whose signals have been compensated by the buffer circuit 501 in FIG. 15 are supplied to the LED driver 509 in FIG. 19.
The LED driver 509 is a device that outputs a light emitting drive current according to a clock signal CLK_L and a data signal DATA_L, and in this case, it is mainly used as a serial/parallel (S/P) conversion circuit for driving a motor.
The LED driver 509 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 for light emission drive current, and can output drive current for 24 systems, but in this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, Seven terminals are used: LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, and LEDR3. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to ground.
And the output of output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3 (current 23-R1, 23-G1, 23-B1, 23-R2, 23-G2, 23-B2, 23-R3) is After being buffered by the buffer circuit 508, the signals are supplied to the input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4 of the motor driver 510, and to the input terminals IN1, IN3, and IN4 of the motor driver 511.

Note that the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3 are used to flow current 23-R1, 23-G1, 23-B1, 23-R2, 23-G2, 23-B2, 23-R3. is connected to a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via chip resistors RA6C and RA7C.

The motor driver 510 outputs motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/2 from output terminals OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4 based on the signals of input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4. Output.
The motor driver 511 outputs motor drive signals MOT3-1, MOT3-3, and MOT3-4 from output terminals OUT1, OUT3, and OUT4 based on signals at input terminals IN1, IN3, and IN4.

The motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/2, MOT3-1 are supplied to the connector CN10 in FIG. 20, and the motor drive signals MOTφ1, MOTφ/1, MOTφ2, It is output to the button LED connection board 640 as MOTφ/2 and DCMOT3.
The motor drive signals MOT3-3 and MOT3-4 are supplied to the connector CN3C in FIG. 17 and output to the relay board 550 as the above-mentioned general-purpose drive signal 1 and general-purpose drive signal 2.

The above is a circuit system in the front frame LED connection board 500 that uses the clock signal CLK_L-, the data signal DATA_L-, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU_L- to generate motor drive signals for the downstream button LED connection board 640 and the subsequent parts.

The clock signal CLK_M, data signal DATA_M, enable signal ENABLE_M, and clear signal CLR_M (reset signal RESET_M) input from the connector CN2C in FIG. The signal is supplied to the A1 terminal, A3 terminal, A5 terminal, and A7 terminal of the buffer circuit 503. The signal-compensated outputs of the Y1, Y3, Y5, and Y7 terminals of the buffer circuit 503 are output from the connector CN3C to the relay board 550 as a clock signal CLK_M, a data signal DATA_M, an enable signal ENABLE_M, and a reset signal RESET_M. .

Therefore, to the downstream side after the relay board 550, the signal for motor control from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 is transmitted after signal compensation by the buffer circuits 501 and 503.

Note that the clock signal CLK_M is a constant voltage/protection circuit made up of a Zener diode D12C and a resistor R22C, the enable signal ENABLE_M is a constant voltage/protection circuit made up of a Zener diode D16C and a resistor R24C, and the data signal DATA_M is a constant voltage/protection circuit made up of a Zener diode D14C and a resistor R23C. The protection circuit and reset signal RESET_M are output from the connector CN3C via constant voltage/protection circuits each including a Zener diode D17C and a resistor R25C.

The clock signal S_IN_CLK and load signal S_IN_LOAD input from the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 are supplied to the A3 terminal and A2 terminal of the buffer circuit 502 in FIG. 17. The signal-compensated outputs of the Y3 and Y2 terminals of the buffer circuit 502 are output from the connector CN3C to the relay board 550 as a clock signal S_IN_CLK and a load signal S_IN_LOAD.
Therefore, signals for serial data transmission are transmitted after being compensated by the buffer circuits 501 and 502 downstream after the relay board 550.

Note that the clock signal S_IN_CLK is output from the connector CN3C through a constant voltage/protection circuit including a Zener diode D3C and a resistor R11C, and the load signal S_IN_LOAD is output from a constant voltage/protection circuit including a Zener diode D2C and a resistor R9C.

The serial data signal S_IN_DATAx inputted from the relay board 550 on the downstream side through the connector CN3C in FIG. 17 is supplied to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 502. The signal-compensated output of the Y1 terminal of the buffer circuit 502 is input to the SI terminal (serial input terminal) of the P/S conversion circuit 505 in FIG.

The P/S conversion circuit 505 and the P/S conversion circuit 506 in the figure are CMOS 8-bit shift registers, have 8-bit parallel input/output, serial input, and serial output, and perform parallel-to-serial conversion of data. .
When the P/S CONT terminal = L, the 8 terminals from Q/D1 to Q/D8 become parallel outputs, and the data on the SI terminal is stored in each register at the rising edge of the input waveform on the CK terminal, and the Q/D1 terminal ～Output to Q/D8 terminal. Furthermore, by setting the CLR/LOAD terminal to L, each register is reset asynchronously to the input to the CK terminal.
When the P/S CONT terminal = H, the 8 terminals from Q/D1 to Q/D8 become parallel inputs, and when the CLR/LOAD terminal = L, input from the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals is asynchronous to the CK terminal input. Data is stored in each register.

In this example, the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 set the P/S CONT terminal = H by applying 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) to the P/S CONT terminal, and the Q/D1 terminal to Q The 8 terminals of the /D8 terminal are used as parallel inputs.
Further, the clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD inputted from the connector CN2C in FIG. That is, the clock signal S_IN_CLK becomes an input to the CK terminal, and the load signal S_IN_LOAD becomes an input to the CLR/LOAD terminal.

For the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals, which are the parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 505, the Q/D1 terminal receives a sense signal SENS8, the Q/D2 terminal receives a sense signal SENS9, and the Q/D4 terminal receives a sense signal SENS11. , sense signal SENS14 is input to the Q/D7 terminal.
Q/D3, Q/D5, Q/D6, and Q/D8 terminals are connected to ground. That is, each input becomes "0" (L level).
Sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 are input from the downstream button LED connection board 640 to the connector CN10C in FIG. 20, and are used to detect the switch sensor that detects button operations and the rotational position and origin position of the movable body inside the button. This is the detection signal of the sensor.
The sense signal SENS14 is a touch sensor detection signal input from the connector CN9C in FIG.

The P/S conversion circuit 505 converts the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx and the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 input as described above into serial data and outputs the serial data signal SDT1 from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT1 is input to the SI terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 506.

For the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals, which are the parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 506, the Q/D1 terminal receives the sense signal SENS0, the Q/D2 terminal receives the sense signal SENS1, and the Q/D3 terminal receives the sense signal SENS2. , a sense signal SENS3 is input to the Q/D4 terminal, a sense signal SENS4 is input to the Q/D5 terminal, a sense signal SENS5 is input to the Q/D6 terminal, a sense signal SENS6 is input to the Q/D7 terminal, and a sense signal SENS7 is input to the Q/D8 terminal.
These sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are detection signals for the cross key 15a, etc., which are input to the connector CN7C in FIG.
The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 from the connector CN7C are signal compensated by the buffer circuit 507 and then input to the above-mentioned terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 506.

As described above, the P/S conversion circuit 506 collectively converts the serial data signal SDT1 from the P/S conversion circuit 505 inputted to the SI terminal and the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 into serial data, and outputs the Q8 as the serial data signal SDT2. Output from the terminal. This serial data signal SDT2 is input to the buffer circuit 513 via a filter including a resistor R35C and a capacitor C27C, and is buffered. This output is transmitted to the upstream side from the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500.

As described above, the front frame LED connection board 500 has the following configuration.
FIG. 21 shows clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M (reset signals RESET_L, RESET_M), data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose signals HANYOU, and enable signals supplied from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 to the connector CN2C. The flow regarding ENABLE_M is summarized.

・Clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), data signal DATA_L, and general-purpose signal HANYOU are sent to connector CN3C via buffer circuits 501 and 502 as clock signal CLK_P, reset signal RESET_P, data signal DATA_P, and enable signal ENABLE_L. Sent downstream.
- The clock signal CLK_L, the clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), and the data signal DATA_L are transmitted to the downstream side by the connector CN1C via the buffer circuit 504 as the clock signal CLK, the reset signal RESET, and the data signal DATA.
- The clock signal CLK_L, the clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), and the data signal DATA_L are transmitted via the buffer circuit 512 to the downstream side by the connector CN10C as the clock signal CLK_L, the clear signal CLR_L, and the data signal DATA_L.
- The clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU are supplied to the LED driver 509 and used to generate a motor drive current.

・Clock signal CLK_M, clear signal CLR_M (reset signal RESET_M), data signal DATA_M, and enable signal ENABLE_M are sent to connector CN3C via buffer circuits 501 and 503 as clock signal CLK_M, reset signal RESET_M, data signal DATA_M, and enable signal ENABLE_M. Sent downstream.

- Motor drive signals MOTφ1, MOTφ/1, MOTφ2, MOTφ/2, and DCMOT3 are generated by the LED driver 509, buffer circuit 508, and motor drivers 510 and 511 used as an S/P conversion circuit, and are sent to the downstream side from connector CN10C. be done.

Further, FIG. 22 summarizes the flow of the serial data signal S_IN_DATA, clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, and sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14.

- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are transmitted from the connector CN3C to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 502.
- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied to the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 via the buffer circuit 513 and used for parallel/serial conversion processing.

・The serial data signal S_IN_DATAx inputted to the connector CN3C from the downstream side is inputted to the P/S conversion circuit 505 via the buffer circuit 502, and is combined into sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 in the P/S conversion circuit 505. The signal is converted into serial data and input to the P/S conversion circuit 506 as the serial data signal SDT1. Furthermore, sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 inputted from the downstream side to the connector CN7C are inputted to the P/S conversion circuit 506 via the buffer circuit 507. In the P/S conversion circuit 506, the serial data signal SDT1 from the P/S conversion circuit 505 and the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are combined into serial data, and a serial data signal SDT2 is output. This serial data signal SDT2 is transmitted from the connector CN2C to the upstream side via the buffer circuit 513 as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500.

Further, the front frame LED connection board 500 further has the following configuration.
-Relays the audio signal to the speaker and sends it to the speaker unit.
- Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) through connector CN2C and uses it as an operating power source.
- The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) used for motor drive signal generation are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). Separating the power supplies according to the application, such as 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for LED and LED driver, 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) for motor drive, and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) for motor driver, reduces the adverse effects of noise. is prevented.
- 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are supplied to the downstream side as operating power supply voltages.

In addition, in the front frame LED connection board 500, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 20, including those mentioned above, resistors R1C, R2C, etc., resistors by chip resistors RA1C, RA2C, etc., and capacitor C1C are installed at required locations. , C2C . . . , diodes (including Zener diodes and Schottky barrier diodes) D1C, D2C .
As a damping resistor for signal lines such as clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose output port signals (general-purpose signal HANYOU), and enable signal ENABLE_M, install a resistor on the connector CN2C side in Figure 15. R8C, R10C, R12C, R13C, R14C, R16C, R17C, and R18C are inserted, and chip resistors RA1C and RA2C are also inserted. In other words, the waveform is shaped by inserting a damping resistor near the connector CN2C and before the signal branch.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1C to TP14C are provided and used for connection to required locations.
Although not shown, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise is appropriately placed between the 5V DC or 12V DC power supply line and the ground.

[5.4 Relay board 550]

The configuration of the relay board 550 is shown in FIG. Connectors CN1D and CN2D are mounted on the relay board 550.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H9 connecting between the connector CN1D and the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 in FIG. 17 is connected.
Therefore, this connector CN1D has 22 terminals from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "22", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN3C described above. Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN1D are also connected to ground for mounting strength.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H10 that connects the downstream side unit upper right LED board 600 is connected to the connector CN2D.
This connector CN2D has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "20".

Four pins, the 3rd pin, the 9th pin, the 11th pin, and the 16th pin, are used as ground terminals.
The first pin is a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) terminal.
Two pins, the fifth pin and the seventh pin, are terminals for a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB).

The second pin is assigned as a serial data signal S_IN_DATAx, the fourth pin is assigned as a load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin is assigned as a clock signal S_IN_CLK.

8th pin is enable signal ENABLE_L, 10th pin is clock signal CLK_P, 12th pin is reset signal RESET_P, 13th pin is clock signal CLK_M, 14th pin is data signal DATA_P, 15th pin is reset signal RESET_M, 17th pin The pins are assigned as data signal DATA_M, the 18th pin as drive general-purpose signal 1, the 19th pin as enable signal ENABLE_M, and the 20th pin as drive general-purpose signal 2.

In this relay board 550, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) assigned to the three terminals of the 5th pin, the 7th pin, and the 9th pin of the connector CN1D is applied to the 2 terminals of the 5th pin and the 7th pin on the connector CN2D side. The data are aggregated and transferred to the downstream side.
In addition, on the connector CN1D, the 5 terminals of the 1st pin, 3rd pin, 11th pin, 13th pin, and 18th pin are used as ground terminals, and on the connector CN2D side, the 3rd pin, 9th pin, 11th pin, It has four terminals, the 16th pin.
This reduces the number of terminals of the connector CN2D to the downstream side.
Furthermore, the connector CN1D and the connector CN2D are of different types. Connector CN2D has a larger rated current per pin, and therefore the number of power supply terminals and ground terminals of connector CN2D can be reduced.
Furthermore, the connector CN2D is easier to insert and remove than the connector CN1D, and has thicker terminals and a larger housing.

[5.5 Side unit upper right LED board 600]

The side unit upper right LED board 600 will be explained using FIGS. 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, and 29. These figures separately show the circuit configuration provided on the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.

The side unit upper right LED board 600 is equipped with connectors CN1E shown in FIG. 24, connectors CN7E shown in FIG. 25, connectors CN2E and CN3E shown in FIG. 26, and connectors CN4E, CN5E, and CN6E shown in FIG. 28.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H10 connecting between the connector CN1E of FIG. 24 and the connector CN2D of the relay board 550 of FIG. 23 is connected.
Therefore, this connector CN1E has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "20", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2D described above.

The connector CN7E in FIG. 25 is connected to the sensor 101S (see FIG. 55) in the side unit device 101 shown in FIG. 10, and the sense signal SENS2X is input to the third pin. This sensor 101S is, for example, a sensor that detects a player's operation of the side unit device 101. The sense signal SENS2X of the sensor 101S is pulled up by a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R64E.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the power supply voltage on the sensor 101S side of the side unit device 101, is applied to the first pin. The second pin is used as a ground terminal.

The connector CN2E in FIG. 26 is a six-terminal connector to which the transmission line end of the transmission line H12 connecting with the side unit upper LED board 630 on the downstream side is connected.
The 1st to 6th pins of this connector CN2E are assigned as a ground terminal, a clock signal CLK terminal, a data signal DATA terminal, a reset signal RESET terminal, a ground terminal, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal. .

The transmission line end of the transmission line H11 that connects the downstream side unit lower right LED board 620 is connected to the connector CN3E.
This connector CN3E has 16 terminals from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "16".

The first pin is a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) terminal.
The 8th pin and the 13th pin are used as ground terminals.
The 15th pin is a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) terminal. Note that a Zener diode D11E is connected between the 15th pin and the ground as a protection circuit.

The 2nd pin is a clock signal CLK, the 3rd pin is a sense signal SENS1X, the 4th pin is a data signal DATA, the 5th pin is a sense signal SENS_A, the 6th pin is a reset signal RESET, the 7th pin is a sense signal SENS_B, the 9th pin is a sense signal SENS_B The pins are assigned as each terminal of the sense signal SENS_C.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 25, the sense signal SENS1X is pulled up by a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R13E.
Furthermore, the sense signal SENS_A, the sense signal SENS_B, and the sense signal SENS_C are also pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via resistors R29E, R27E, and R21E, respectively.

In addition, the connector CN3E in Figure 26 has the 10th pin as the motor drive signal MOT1-/2, the 12th pin as the motor drive signal MOT1-/1, the 14th pin as the motor drive signal MOT1-2, and the 16th pin as the motor drive signal. Assigned as each terminal of MOT1-1.
Note that Zener diodes D10E, D12E, D13E, and D14E are connected as protection circuits between the 10th pin, 12th pin, 14th pin, and 16th pin and the ground, respectively.

Connector CN4E in FIG. 28 is connected to the side unit upper right movable motor 104 (see FIG. 10). The first pin of this connector CN4E is a terminal for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and the second pin is a terminal for a vibration control signal L_VIB.

Connector CN5E is connected to the side unit upper right movable solenoid 105 (see FIG. 10). The first pin of this connector CN5E is a terminal for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and the second pin is a terminal for a solenoid control signal L_SOL_01.

Connector CN6E is connected to the blower 106 (see FIG. 10) on the side unit. The first pin of this connector CN6E is a terminal for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and the second pin is a terminal for a blower control signal L_BRO.

Note that the conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN2E, CN3E, CN4E, CN5E, CN6E, and CN7E are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

The power supply voltage at the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit will be explained.
A buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25, a buffer circuit 604 in FIG. 26, and a buffer circuit 607 in FIG. 28 are mounted as ICs on the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. These are 8-circuit Schmitt trigger buffers similar to the buffer circuit 402 previously described with reference to FIG.
A 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is the voltage on the positive electrode side of the capacitor C1E via the fuse F1E with respect to the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) supplied from the first pin of the connector CN1E in FIG.

Furthermore, the P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 shown in FIG. 25 are mounted as ICs, and the power supply voltage for these is also set to 5V direct current voltage (DC5V). P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 are ICs similar to P/S conversion circuit 505 in FIG.

Furthermore, the LED driver 605 shown in FIG. 27 and the LED driver 606 shown in FIG. 28 are mounted as ICs, and the power supply voltage for these is the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 5th and 7th pins of the connector CN1E. It will be done.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in this case is taken out from the fifth and seventh pins of the connector CN1E in FIG. 24 as a voltage on the positive side of the capacitor C2E via the fuse F2E.

Furthermore, motor drivers 608 and 609 shown in FIG. 28 are mounted as ICs, and these use a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) as power supply voltages.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB).
As shown in FIG. 29, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D8E is connected to the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) line. A resistor R23E, capacitors C10E and C11E, and a chip varistor 611 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D8E and the ground. With this configuration, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as a power supply voltage protected from overvoltage.
As shown in the figure, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using a circuit including a diode D7E, a resistor R17E, and a capacitor C8E.

The flow of various signals in the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit will be explained below.
The load signal S_IN_LOAD, clock signal S_IN_CLK, enable signal ENABLE_L (reset signal RESET_M), clock signal CLK_P, reset signal RESET_P, and data signal DATA_P are input from the relay board 550 to the connector CN1E in FIG. 24, and these signals are damped. The signal is supplied to the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 via resistors R66E, R9E, R11E, and R12E, and signal compensation is performed.
As shown in FIG. 24, the signal paths for these signals include a resistor R3E and a Zener diode D2E, a resistor R6E and a Zener diode D3E, a resistor R66E and a Zener diode D15E, a resistor R9E and a Zener diode D6E, and a resistor R11E and a Zener diode D5E. , a protection circuit including a resistor R12E and a Zener diode D15E is provided.

Clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P are signal-compensated in buffer circuit 601, and then output as clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A, and input to buffer circuit 604 in FIG. 26. In this case, the clock signal CLK_A is input to the A1 and A5 terminals, the data signal DATA_A is input to the A2 and A6 terminals, and the reset signal RESET_A is input to the A3 and A7 terminals.
The buffered signals output from the Y1, Y2, and Y3 terminals are output as a clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET from the connector CN2E via damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E.
Further, the buffered signals outputted from the Y5, Y6, and Y7 terminals are outputted as a clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET from the connector CN3E via damping resistors R24E, R25E, and R26E.

That is, the clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A shown in FIG. 26 are each branched into two systems before being input to the buffer circuit 604, and each is buffered. Then, they are output as a clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET to separate boards from connectors CN2E and CN3E, respectively. Therefore, the buffer circuit 604 performs buffer processing while branching into two systems, and appropriate buffer processing can be performed after each branch.
Furthermore, the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET output from connectors CN2E and CN3E in this way are originally the clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P input from connector CN1E in FIG. . These are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 as described above, and then output as the clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A, and are branched into two systems at the stage of the buffer circuit 604 in FIG. 26. . In other words, by performing buffer processing before branching, the attenuation in the transmission path up to that point is compensated for before branching. A stable signal supply is achieved when a common signal is distributed to two boards.

The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A output from the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 are also supplied to the LED driver 605 in FIG. 27.
The LED driver 605 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A.
The LED driver 605 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 for light emission drive current, and can output drive current for 24 systems, but in this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, It uses 14 terminals: LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, LEDB4, LEDR5, LEDG5. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to ground.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, LEDB4, LEDR5, and LEDG5 are connected to each of the 14 LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 612, Flow the light emission drive current (25-R1, 25-G1, 25-B1...25-R5, 25-G5, 25-B5).
As shown in the figure, each system of LED circuits of the light emitting section 612 is composed of two or three LEDs (LED1, LED2, . . . ) connected in series and a resistance element. The LED circuits of each system are connected in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In this configuration, the clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P input from the connector CN1E in FIG. 24 are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 and then branched. The buffered clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A are supplied to the LED driver 605 in FIG. 27 as one of the branches. The other branch is supplied to the buffer circuit 604 in FIG. 26, further branched, and after buffer processing is sent to the downstream board from connectors CN2E and CN3E.
In this case, by buffering the signal for light emission drive control in the buffer circuit 601 and then branching it for transmission to the LED driver and downstream board, stable transmission can be achieved and the buffer circuit configuration can be made more efficient. It has become

Further, the clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_M output from the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 are supplied to the LED driver 606 in FIG. 28.
The LED driver 606 is a device that outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_M, but in this case, it mainly functions as a serial/parallel conversion circuit for driving a motor. The LED driver 606 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 for light emission drive current, and can output drive current for 24 systems, but in this case, the output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, Seven terminals are used: LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, and LEDG3. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to ground.
And the output of output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3 (current 30-G1, 30-B1, 30-R2, 30-G2, 30-B2, 30-R3, 30-G3) is After being buffered by a buffer circuit 607, the signals are supplied to input terminals IN2, IN3, IN4 of a motor driver 608 and input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4 of a motor driver 609.

Note that the output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, and LEDG3 are connected to a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via resistors R60E, R61E, R62E, R56E, R57E, R58E, and R59E. This is to flow currents 30-G1, 30-B1, 30-R2, 30-G2, 30-B2, 30-R3, and 30-G3 using a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) as a power source.

The motor driver 608 outputs a blower control signal L_BRO, a solenoid control signal L_SOL01, and a vibration control signal L_VIB from output terminals OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4 based on the signals of input terminals IN2, IN3, and IN4. These blower control signal L_BRO, solenoid control signal L_SOL01, and vibration control signal L_VIB are supplied to connectors CN6E, CN5E, and CN4E, respectively.

The motor driver 609 outputs motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-/2 from output terminals OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 based on the signals of input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4. Output. These motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/1, and MOT1-/2 are supplied to connector CN3E in FIG. 26.
Therefore, the circuit from the LED driver 605 to the motor driver 609 becomes a circuit system that generates a motor drive signal for the lower right side unit LED board 620 on the downstream side within the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.

The load signal S_IN_LOAD and clock signal S_IN_CLK input from the connector CN1E in FIG. 24 are compensated by the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. Input to CLR/LOAD pin and CK pin to control parallel/serial conversion processing.
In the P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603, the P/S CONT terminal is set to H by applying a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) to the P/S CONT terminal, and the 8 terminals of the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals are set to H. The terminals are used as parallel inputs.

For the Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal, which are the parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 603, the Q/D1 terminal receives the sense signal SENS_C, the Q/D2 terminal receives the sense signal SENS_B, and the Q/D4 terminal receives the sense signal SENS_A. , sense signal SENS1X is input to the Q/D4 terminal, and sense signal SENS2X is input to the Q/D5 terminal.
Q/D6, Q/D7, and Q/D8 terminals are connected to ground.
Sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, and SENS1X are input from connector CN3E. Sense signal SENS2X is input from connector CN7E.

The P/S conversion circuit 603 converts the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X inputted as described above into serial data (serial data signal SDT3) and outputs it from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT3 is input to the SI terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 602.

In the Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal, which are the parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 602, 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied to the Q/D1 terminal, Q/D2 terminal, and Q/D8 terminal, and the other is connected to ground.
The P/S conversion circuit 602 collects the serial data signal SDT3 from the P/S conversion circuit 603 inputted to the SI terminal and the logic (H/L) of the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals and converts it into serial data (serial It is converted into a data signal SDT4) and output from the Q8 terminal. This serial data signal SDT4 is input to the buffer circuit 601 and buffered. This output is transmitted as a serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit to the upstream side from the connector CN1E via the damping resistor R1E in FIG. 24.

As described above, the side unit upper right LED board 600 has the following configuration.
- Enable signal ENABLE_L (reset signal RESET_M), clock signal CLK_P, reset signal RESET_P, and data signal DATA_P are input, and the buffer circuit 601 performs buffer processing on these. The signal after buffer processing is used for LED light emission, used for generating a motor drive signal, or transferred to the downstream side.

- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied to the P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 via the buffer circuit 601 and used for parallel/serial conversion processing.
・The various sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X are collectively converted into serial data to generate the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx. This serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is transmitted to the upstream side. As described above, this serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is further converted into serial data together with the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS1 in the front frame LED connection board 500, and is used as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA to connect the inner frame LED relay board 400. It will be transmitted to the production control board 30 via.

- Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) through connector CN1E and uses it as an operating power source.
- The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) used for motor drive signal generation are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
- 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are supplied to the downstream side as operating power supply voltages.

In addition, in the side unit upper right LED board 600, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, including those mentioned above, resistors R1E, R2E..., capacitors C1E, C2E..., and diodes (Zener diodes) are installed at required locations. ) D1E, D2E, etc. are connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1E, TP2E, . . . are provided and used for connection to required locations.
Although not shown, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise is appropriately placed between the 5V DC or 12V DC power supply line and the ground.

[5.6 Side unit lower right LED board 620]

The lower right LED board 620 of the side unit will be explained using FIGS. 30 and 31. These figures separately show the circuit configuration provided on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.

Connectors CN1F, CN3F, and CN4F in FIG. 30 and connector CN2F in FIG. 31 are mounted on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit as connectors.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H11 that connects the connector CN3F of FIG. 30 with the connector CN3E of the upper right side unit LED board 600 of FIG. 26 is connected.
Therefore, this connector CN3F has 16 terminals from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "16", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN3E described above.

Connector CN1F is connected to side unit lower right movable motor 103 shown in FIG.
A 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied to the third and fourth pins. The motor drive signals MOT1-/2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, and MOT1-1 input from the connector CN3F are output from the first pin, second pin, fifth pin, and sixth pin.

Connector CN4F is connected to the side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102 shown in FIG.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. The third pin becomes an input terminal for the sense signal SENS1X from the connected position detection switch.

Connector CN2F in FIG. 31 is connected to an LED board 625 (not shown in FIG. 11, see FIG. 55) arranged in the side unit 10. The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal. The second to fifth pins serve as terminals for light emission drive signals.

Note that the conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1F, CN2F, CN3F, and CN4F are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

The power supply voltage at the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit will be explained.
Photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are mounted on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.
A 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these. 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the first pin of connector CN3F.

Furthermore, the LED driver 621 shown in FIG. 31 is mounted as an IC on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 11th pin of the connector CN1E is used as the power supply voltage for this. .
Further, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) output from the connector CN1F in FIG. 30 is supplied from the 15th pin of the connector CN3F.

The flow of various signals in the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit will be explained.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN3F from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 621 in FIG. 31.
The LED driver 621 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 621 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 for light emission drive current, and can output drive current for 24 systems, but in this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LED light emission is driven using 12 terminals: LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, and LEDB4. Furthermore, the four output terminals LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, and LEDR8 are used to drive the LED light emission of an unillustrated LED board connected to the connector CN2F. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to ground.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, and LEDB4 are connected to each of the 12 LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 622, and the light emission drive current ( 27-R1, 27-G1, 27-B1...27-R4, 27-G4, 27-B4).
As shown in the figure, each LED circuit of the light emitting section 622 is composed of one or three LEDs connected in series and a resistor element. The LED circuits of each system are connected in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.
The output terminals LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, and LEDR8 are connected to four systems of the light emitting drive section 623. The light emission drive section 623 outputs four systems of light emission drive currents (27-R7, 27-G7, 27-B7...27-R8) from the connector CN2F.

Sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are obtained by photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F in FIG. 30. These are transmitted from the connector CN3F to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.
Further, the sense signal SENS1X obtained from the connector CN4F is also transmitted from the connector CN3F to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.
These sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, and SENS1X are converted into serial data as described above.

In addition, in the side unit lower right LED board 620, electronic elements such as resistors R1F, R2F, etc., capacitors C1F, C2F, etc. are installed at required locations, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, including those mentioned above. is connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1F, TP2F, . . . are provided and used for connection to required locations.

[5.7 Side unit upper LED board 630]

The side unit upper LED board 630 will be explained using FIG. 32.
A connector CN1T is mounted on the side unit upper LED board 630.
The transmission line end of the transmission line H12 connecting between the connector CN1T and the connector CN2E of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit in FIG. 26 is connected.

Therefore, this connector CN1T has a 6-terminal configuration from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "6", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2E described above.
Note that the conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of the connector CN1T are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

On this side unit upper LED board 630, an LED driver 631 is mounted as an IC, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the sixth pin of the connector CN1T is used as a power supply voltage for the LED driver 631.

The flow of various signals will be explained.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN1T from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 631.
The LED driver 631 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 631 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 for light emission drive current, and can output drive current for 24 systems, but in this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LED light emission is driven using nine terminals: LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, and LEDB3. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to ground.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, and LEDB3 are connected to each of the nine LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 632, and the light emitting drive current (27-R1, 27- G1, 27-B1...27-R3, 27-G3, 27-B3).
As shown in the figure, each LED circuit of the light emitting section 632 is composed of two LEDs connected in series and a resistor element. The LED circuits of each system are connected in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In addition, in the side unit upper LED board 630, electronic elements such as resistors R1T, R2T, . . . , capacitors C1T, C2T, . . . are connected at required locations, as shown in FIG. .
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1T, TP2T, . . . are provided and used for connection to required locations.

[5.8 Button LED connection board 640]

The button LED connection board 640 will be explained using FIG. 33.
The button LED connection board 640 is equipped with connectors CN1G, CN2G, CN3G, CN4G, CN5G, CN6G, and CN8G as connectors.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H15 connecting between the connector CN1G and the connector CN10C of the front frame LED connection board 500 in FIG. 20 is connected.
Therefore, this connector CN1E has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "20", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN10C described above.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H16 that connects the button LED board 660 shown in FIG. 11 is connected to the connector CN2G.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the power supply voltage of the button LED board 660, is applied to the third and seventh pins. The first pin and the sixth pin are ground terminals.
The second pin, fourth pin, and fifth pin are used as terminals for a clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET, respectively.

Connector CN3G is connected to a motor (not shown).
The motor drive signals MOTφ1, MOTφ/1, MOTφ2, and MOTφ/2 input from the connector CN1G are output from the 6th pin, the 2nd pin, the 5th pin, and the 1st pin of the connector CN3G.
Further, a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) input from the connector CN1G is applied to the third and fourth pins as the illustrated 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12VA).

Connector CN4G is connected to a vibration device (not shown). A 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12VA) is applied to the first pin as a power supply voltage for the vibration device, and a motor drive signal DCMOT3 input from the connector CN1G is outputted to the second pin as a drive signal for the vibration device. A DC motor is used for the vibration device.

Connector CN5G is connected to a push button sensor within production button 13.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. The third pin becomes an input terminal for the sense signal SENS8 from the connected push button sensor.

Connector CN6G is connected to the rotation origin sensor.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin becomes an input terminal for the sense signal SENS9 from the connected rotation origin sensor.

Connector CN8G is connected to the rotation effect light sensor.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin becomes an input terminal for the sense signal SENS11 from the connected rotation effect light sensor.

Note that conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of each connector CN1G, CN2G, CN3G, CN4G, CN5G, CN6G, and CN8G are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

A buffer circuit 641 is mounted on this button LED connection board 640. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used. 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 8th pin of connector CN1G.

The flow of various signals in the button LED connection board 640 will be explained.
The clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L, and data signal DATA_L supplied from the upstream front frame LED connection board 500 to the connector CN1G are input to the buffer circuit 641 via the chip resistor RA1G and buffered. The signal is then sent to the connector CN2G via the chip resistor RA2G, and is sent to the button LED board 660 downstream.
Note that a capacitor C1G is inserted between the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) of the buffer circuit 641 and the ground.

Although not shown, in the button LED connection board 640, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise is appropriately placed between the 5V DC or 12V DC power line and the ground.

[5.9 Button LED board 660]

The button LED board 660 will be explained using FIGS. 34 and 35. These figures separately show the circuit configuration provided on the button LED board 660.

The button LED board 660 is equipped with the connector CN1H shown in FIG. 34.
The transmission line end of the transmission line H16 connecting between the connector CN1H and the connector CN2G of the button LED connection board 640 in FIG. 33 is connected.
Therefore, this connector CN1H has a 7-terminal configuration from the first pin to the seventh pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "7", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2G described above.
Further, conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of the connector CN1H are connected to ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

This button LED board 660 is supplied with 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as a power supply voltage input to the connector CN1H.
The LED driver 661 in FIG. 34 and the LED driver 663 in FIG. 35 are mounted on the button LED board 660 as ICs, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for these.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is also used as the power supply voltage for the light emitting parts 664 and 662.

The flow of various signals on the button LED board 660 will be explained.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are inputted to the connector CN1H from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 661 via the chip resistor RA1H shown in FIG.
The LED driver 661 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 661 drives 24 systems of LED light emission using output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . . . LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 for light emission drive current.
That is, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 are connected to each of the 24 LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 662, and the light emitting drive current (19-R1, 19-G1, 19 -B1...19-R8, 19-G8, 19-B8).
As shown in the figure, each LED circuit of the light emitting section 662 is composed of two or three LEDs connected in series and a resistor element. The LED circuits of each system are connected in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

The clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET are also supplied to the LED driver 663 in FIG. 35.
The LED driver 663 drives six systems of LED light emission using three output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . . . LEDR6, LEDG6, LEDB6 for light emission drive current.
That is, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR6, LEDG6, LEDB6 are connected to each of the six LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 664, and the light emitting drive current (20-R1, 20-G1, 20 -B1...20-R6, 20-G6, 20-B6).
As shown in the figure, each LED circuit of the light emitting section 664 is composed of two or three LEDs connected in series and a resistance element. A Zener diode is connected in parallel to each LED. The LED circuits of each system are connected in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In addition to the above-mentioned lower right side unit LED board 620, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, resistors R1H, R2H..., capacitors C1H, C2H..., diodes (Zener Electronic elements such as D1H, D2H, etc. (including diodes) are connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1H, TP2H, . . . are provided and used for connection to required locations.

[5.10 LED connection board 700]

Next, we will explain the board placed on the game board 3 side.
First, the LED connection board 700 will be explained using FIGS. 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, and 41. These figures separately show the circuit configuration provided on the LED connection board 700.
As shown in FIG. 11, the LED connection board 700 is a board connected to the production control board 30 on the game board 3.

The LED connection board 700 includes connectors CN1J in FIG. 36, connectors CN5J and CN6J in FIG. 37, connectors CN2J, CN3J, CN4J, and CN12J in FIG. 38, connectors CN10J in FIG. 41 connectors CN8J and CN9J are installed.

The connector CN1J in FIG. 36 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H20 that connects with the production control board 30 as shown in FIG.
This connector CN1J has 40 terminals from the 1st pin to the 40th pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "40".

1st pin, 2nd pin, 8th pin, 9th pin, 10th pin, 16th pin, 18th pin, 19th pin, 20th pin, 22nd pin, 29th pin, 31st pin of connector CN1J , the 32nd pin, the 33rd pin, the 34th pin, the 39th pin, and the 40th pin are connected to the ground.
The fourth pin and the sixth pin are terminals for a 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB).
The 12th pin, 14th pin, 24th pin, 26th pin, 28th pin, and 30th pin are terminals for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 11th pin, 17th pin, 35th pin, and 37th pin are unused.

The third pin is assigned as a clock signal P_S_IN_CLK, the fifth pin as a serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA, and the seventh pin as a load signal P_S_IN_LOAD.
The serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA is serial data sent from the LED connection board 700 to the performance control board 30, and the clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are supplied from the performance control board 30 for transmitting the serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA. It's a signal.

The 13th pin is assigned as a clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK, and the 15th pin is assigned as a serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA terminal.
The serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA is serial data transmitted from the production control board 30 together with the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK.

The 21st pin is the clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), the 23rd pin is the clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), the 25th pin is the serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), and the 27th pin is the enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch It is assigned as each terminal of the signal LATCH_M).
The serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA is serial data transmitted from the production control board 30 together with the clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK.

Note that conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN1J and connectors CN2J, CN3J, CN4J, CN5J, CN6J, CN7J, CN8J, CN9J, CN10J, CN11J, and CN12J, which will be described later, are connected to ground for mounting strength.

Connector CN5J in FIG. 37 is connected to a motor of a movable object (not shown). A 18V DC voltage (MOT18VA), which is the power supply voltage of the motor, is applied to the third and fourth pins.
Assign the 1st pin as the motor drive signal MOT6-/2, the 2nd pin as the motor drive signal MOT6-/1, the 5th pin as the motor drive signal MOT6-2, and the 6th pin as the motor drive signal MOT6-1. has been done.

Connector CN6J in FIG. 37 is also connected to a motor of another movable object (not shown). A 18V DC voltage (MOT18VA), which is the power supply voltage of the motor, is applied to the third and fourth pins.
Assign the 1st pin as the motor drive signal MOT7-/2, the 2nd pin as the motor drive signal MOT7-/1, the 5th pin as the motor drive signal MOT7-2, and the 6th pin as the motor drive signal MOT7-1. has been done.

Connector CN2J in FIG. 38 is connected to the position detection switch of the accessory. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is a power supply voltage on the position detection switch side, is applied to the first pin. The third pin is used as a ground terminal.
For example, a sense signal SENSv0, which is a detection signal of the bottom movable object right position detection switch 121 (see FIG. 10), is input to the second pin of the connector CN2J. The sense signal SENSv0 is pulled up by a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R5J.

Connector CN4J is also connected to the position detection switch of the accessory, the first pin is a terminal for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) which is the power supply voltage on the position detection switch side, and the third pin is a ground terminal.
For example, a sense signal SENSv1, which is a detection signal of the bottom movable object left position detection switch 125 (see FIG. 10), is input to the second pin of this connector CN4J. The sense signal SENSv1 is pulled up by a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R29J.

The connector CN12J is also connected to the position detection switch of the accessory, the first pin is a terminal for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) which is the power supply voltage on the position detection switch side, and the third pin is a ground terminal.
For example, a sense signal SENSv9, which is a detection signal of the lower back movable object upper position detection switch 120 (see FIG. 10), is input to the second pin of this connector CN12J. The sense signal SENSv9 is pulled up by a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R31J.

Connector CN3J is connected to power module board 904 in FIG. The 1st, 2nd, and 4th pins are 18V DC voltage Vout, the 7th, 9th, and 10th pins are 35V DC voltage (DC35V), and the 5th, 6th, and 8th pins are ground. Used as each terminal.

Connector CN10J in FIG. 39 is connected to a relay board (not shown). It has a 32-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 32nd pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "32". The 1st pin is a terminal to which 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied via fuse F6J, The 2nd pin is a terminal to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied via the fuse F9J, and the 3rd, 4th, and 5th pins are terminals to which a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied.
The 9th pin, 13th pin, 17th pin, 21st pin, 25th pin, 27th pin, 29th pin, 30th pin, 31st pin, and 32nd pin are connected to ground.

Assign the 7th pin as the motor drive signal MOT1-/2, the 8th pin as the motor drive signal MOT1-/1, the 10th pin as the motor drive signal MOT1-2, and the 12th pin as the motor drive signal MOT1-1. has been done.
The 14th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT2-/2, the 16th pin is the motor drive signal MOT2-/1, the 18th pin is the motor drive signal MOT2-2, and the 20th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT2-1. has been done.
The 22nd pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT3-/2, the 24th pin is the motor drive signal MOT3-/1, the 26th pin is the motor drive signal MOT3-2, and the 28th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT3-1. has been done.

The seventh pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK_B, and the eleventh pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA_B. The 15th pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv2, the 19th pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv3, and the 23rd pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv4.
The sense signal SENSv2 is, for example, a detection signal of the upper movable object position detection switch 132 in FIG. It's a signal.

Connector CN7J in FIG. 40 is connected to an unillustrated LED board. The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal. The fifth pin and the sixth pin are terminals for an 18V LED drive voltage (LED 18V). The 4th pin, the 7th pin, and the 8th pin are connected to ground.
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK_E, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA_E.

The connector CN11J is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H30 that connects with the lower relay board 800 shown in FIG. 11. It has a 16-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "16".

The 4th and 6th pins are terminals to which 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied via fuse F10J, and the 7th and 9th pins are terminals to which 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied via fuse F11J. It is.
The 1st pin, the 15th pin, and the 16th pin are connected to ground.

The 3rd pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-/2, the 5th pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-/1, the 11th pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-2, and the 13th pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-1. Ru.
The 14th pin is used as a terminal for the sense signal SENSv7. The sense signal SENSv7 is, for example, a detection signal of the lower front movable object position detection switch 123 in FIG.
The second pin, the eighth pin, the tenth pin, and the twelfth pin are terminals for light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8.

Connector CN9J in FIG. 41 is connected to an unillustrated LED board. The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal. The 10th pin is a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) terminal. The fourth pin and the ninth pin are connected to ground.
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK_D, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA_D.
The 8th pin, 7th pin, 6th pin, and 5th pin are terminals for light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8.
The 14th pin is used as a terminal for the sense signal SENSv8. The sense signal SENSv8 is, for example, a detection signal of the distribution position detection switch 122 in FIG.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H21 connecting between the connector CN8J and the back left relay board 720 shown in FIG. 11 is connected to the connector CN8J. It has a 24-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 24th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "24".

The 1st to 4th pins are terminals to which 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) is applied via fuse F12J, and the 5th and 9th pins are terminals to which 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied via fuse F7J. , the 11th pin is a terminal to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is applied via fuse F8J.
The 7th pin, 13th pin, 14th pin, 19th pin, and 20th pin are connected to ground.

The 15th pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK_C, and the 17th pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA_C.
6th and 8th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-/2, 10th and 12th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-/1, 16th and 18th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-2, 22nd and 24th pins are each terminal of the motor drive signal MOT5-1. In this case, the motor to be driven is a high-torque motor and is driven at a 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB). Since the power consumption is large, two pins/lines are used for each of the motor drive signals MOT5-/2, MOT5-/1, MOT5-2, and MOT5-1.
The 21st pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv6, and the 23rd pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv5. The sense signal SENSv6 is, for example, a detection signal of the bottom left movable object lower left position detection switch 128 in FIG.

The power supply voltage at this LED connection board 700 will be explained.
The LED connection board 700 includes, as ICs, buffer circuits 703 and 704 in FIG. 36, which are 8-circuit Schmitt trigger buffers similar to the buffer circuit 402 previously explained in FIG. 13, and a buffer circuit in FIG. 39, which is a triple buffer gate. A circuit 705 and buffer circuits 707 and 708 shown in FIG. 41 are installed.
As the power supply voltage for these, as shown in FIG. 36, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) based on a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the connector CN1J is used.

P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 shown in FIG. 36 are mounted as ICs, and a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these circuits. The 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is taken out from the positive electrode side of the capacitor C4J via the connector CN1J and the fuse F1J. Note that the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 are ICs similar to the P/S conversion circuit 505 in FIG.

Note that the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) outputted downstream from connectors CN2J, CN4J, CN7J, CN8J, CN10J, CN11J, and CN12J is taken out from the positive electrode side of capacitor C5J from connector CN1J via fuse F2J.

Furthermore, motor drivers 710 to 713 shown in FIG. 37 are mounted as ICs on the LED connection board 700, and a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) are used as power supply voltages for these.
Furthermore, motor drivers 714, 715, and 716 are mounted, and as power supply voltages for these, 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are used.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) by a power isolation/protection circuit 790.
As shown in FIG. 36, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D5J is connected to the 12th pin, 14th pin, 24th pin, 26th pin, 28th pin, and 30th pin of connector CN1J. . A resistor R6J, capacitors C14J and C15J, and a chip varistor 709 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D5J and the ground. With this configuration as the power supply separation/protection circuit 790, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as a power supply voltage with overvoltage protection.

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using a circuit including a diode D1J, a resistor R1J, and a capacitor C3J shown in FIG.

The 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA), the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB), and the 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) are separated from the 18V DC voltage Vout input from the connector CN3J, as also shown in FIG.
The anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D7J is connected to the first pin, second pin, and fourth pin to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is applied via the fuse F3J. A resistor R7J and capacitors C17J and C18J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D7J and the ground. With this configuration, a 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA) is extracted.
Further, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D9J is connected to the first, second, and fourth pins to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is similarly applied via the fuse F4J. A resistor R8J and capacitors C20J and C21J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D9J and the ground. With this configuration, 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) is extracted.
Further, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D11J is connected to the first, second, and fourth pins to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is similarly applied via the fuse F5J. A resistor R9J and capacitors C23J and C24J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D11J and the ground. With this configuration, an 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) is extracted.

The flow of various signals in the LED connection board 700 will be explained below.
A clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and a serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are transmitted from the production control board 30 to the connector CN1J in FIG. These are signals used to control operations downstream of the LED connection board 700.

The clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are input to the A5 terminal and the A7 terminal of the buffer circuit 703, and signal compensation is performed as shown as the clock signal CLK_P and the serial data signal DATA_P in FIG.
The signals are outputted from the Y5 terminal and Y7 terminal of the buffer circuit 703, and are input to the buffer circuit 706 in FIG. 40 for buffer processing as shown as a clock signal CLK_A and a serial data signal DATA_A. The signal is then transmitted downstream from the connector CN7J as a clock signal CLK_E and a serial data signal DATA_E.

The clock signal CLK_A and serial data signal DATA_A output from the Y5 and Y7 terminals of the buffer circuit 703 are also input to the buffer circuit 705 in FIG. 39 for buffer processing, and the clock signal CLK_B and serial data signal Sent downstream as DATA_B.
Furthermore, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are also input to the buffer circuit 707 in FIG. 41, where they are buffered and transmitted from the connector CN9J to the downstream side as the clock signal CLK_D and the serial data signal DATA_D.
Furthermore, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are also input to the buffer circuit 708 in FIG. 41, where they are buffered and sent from the connector CN8J to the backside left relay board 720 on the downstream side as the clock signal CLK_C and the serial data signal DATA_C. be done.

The connector CN1J in FIG. 36 receives a clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch signal LATCH_M) from the production control board 30. ) will be sent.
These are used for controlling the motor drive.
These signals are input to the A7 terminal, A1 terminal, A3 terminal, and A5 terminal of the buffer circuit 704 and are compensated. The signals are then input to motor drivers 710 to 716 in FIG. 37, respectively, via chip resistor RA4J.
That is, in each of the motor drivers 710 to 716, the reset signal RESET_M is input to the RESET terminal, the latch signal LATCH_M is input to the LATCH terminal, the clock signal CLK_M is input to the SCLK terminal, and the serial data signal DATA_M is input to the SDIN terminal.

Motor drivers 710 to 713 each generate a 12V motor drive signal in response to these inputs.
That is, the motor driver 710 generates motor drive signals MOT1-/2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, and MOT1-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 711 generates motor drive signals MOT2-/2, MOT2-/1, MOT2-2, and MOT2-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 712 generates motor drive signals MOT3-/1, MOT3-2, and MOT3-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 713 generates motor drive signals MOT4-/2, MOT4-/1, MOT4-2, and MOT4-1 output from the connector CN11J.

Further, the motor drivers 714 to 716 generate 18V motor drive signals, respectively, in response to the input of the reset signal RESET_M, latch signal LATCH_M, clock signal CLK_M, and serial data signal DATA_M.
That is, the motor driver 714 generates motor drive signals MOT5-/2, MOT5-/1, MOT5-2, and MOT5-1 output from the connector CN8J.
The motor driver 715 generates motor drive signals MOT6-/2, MOT6-/1, MOT6-2, and MOT6-1 output from the connector CN5J.
The motor driver 716 generates motor drive signals MOT7-/2, MOT7-/1, MOT7-2, and MOT7-1 output from the connector CN6J.

A clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and a load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are transmitted from the production control board 30 to the connector CN1J in FIG.
The clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are input to the A3 terminal and the A2 terminal of the buffer circuit 703, and the signals are compensated. The signal is then input from the Y3 terminal and Y2 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 to the CK terminal and CLR/LOAD terminal of the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 via the chip resistor RA1J.
In the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702, 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied to the P/S CONT terminal, so that the P/S CONT terminal is set to H, and the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals are set to H. 8 terminals are used as parallel inputs. Then, the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 perform parallel-to-serial conversion according to the clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD.

A sense signal SENSv8 from the connector CN9J in FIG. 41 is input to the Q/D1 terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 701. As shown in FIG. 36, this sense signal SENSv8 is pulled up by a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R23J.
Furthermore, the sense signal SENSv9 from the connector CN12J in FIG. 38 is input to the Q/D2 terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 701.
The inputs of the Q/D3 terminal to Q/D7 terminal are set to ground level "0" (L level), and the Q/D8 terminal is set to 5V level "1" (H level).
The P/S conversion circuit 702 converts the above parallel input into serial data (serial data signal SDT5) and outputs it from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT5 is input to the SI terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 702.

Sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv7 are input to the eight terminals Q/D1 to Q/D8 of the P/S conversion circuit 702. Sense signal SENSv0 is input from connector CN2J. Sense signal SENSv1 is input from connector CN4J. Sense signals SENSv2 to SENSv4 are input from connector CN10J. Sense signals SENSv5 and SENSv6 are input from connector CN8J. Sense signals SENSv5 and SENSv7 are input from connector CN11J.
The sense signals SENSv2 to SENSv7 are each pulled up by a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) via resistors R24J, R2J, and chip resistor RA3J.

As described above, the P/S conversion circuit 702 collectively converts the serial data signal SDT5 from the P/S conversion circuit 701 inputted to the SI terminal and the sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv7 into serial data (serial data signal SDT6). Output from Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT6 is input to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 and buffered. Then, the Y1 output is supplied to the third pin of the connector CN1J via the chip resistor RA1J, and is transmitted to the upstream production control board 30 as a serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA from the LED connection board 700.

As described above, the LED connection board 700 has the following configuration.
- Converts the sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9 input from the downstream side into serial data, and transmits the serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA from the connector CN1J to the upstream side via the buffer circuit 703.
- Transfer the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA transmitted from the production control board 30 to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703 and the buffer circuit (any one of 705, 706, 707, 708).

・The clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), and enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch signal LATCH_M) sent from the production control board 30 are buffered. The motor drive signals (MOT1-/2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, MOT1-1...MOT7-/2, MOT7-/1, MOT7- 2. Generate MOT7-1) and send it to the downstream side (motor).

- Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) through connector CN1J and uses it as an operating power source.
- Receives 18V DC voltage Vout through connector CN3J and uses it as an 18V system operating power source (operating power source for high-intensity LEDs and high-torque motors).
- 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5V), 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V), and 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) are supplied as operating power supply voltages to the downstream side.

In addition, in the LED connection board 700, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 41, including those mentioned above, resistors R1J, R2J..., chip resistors RA1J, RA2J..., and capacitors C1J, C2J are installed at required locations. ..., diodes (including Zener diodes and Schottky barrier diodes) D1J, D2J, and the like are connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1J, TP2J, . . . are provided and used for connection to required locations.
Although not shown, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise is appropriately placed between the 5V DC or 12V DC power supply line and the ground.

[5.11 Back panel left relay board 720]

The configuration of the back left relay board 720 is shown in FIG. Connectors CN1K and CN2K are mounted on the left relay board 720 on the back of the panel.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H21 connecting between the connector CN1K and the connector CN8J of the LED connection board 700 in FIG. 41 is connected to the connector CN1K.
Therefore, this connector CN1K has 24 terminals from the 1st pin to the 24th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "24", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN8J described above.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H22 that connects the downstream decorative board 740 is connected to the connector CN2K.
This connector CN1B has 22 terminals from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "22".

The 4th pin, the 7th pin, and the 10th pin are used as ground terminals.
The sixth pin is a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) terminal.
The 8th pin and the 9th pin are terminals for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 11th pin, 12th pin, 13th pin, and 14th pin are terminals for a 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB).

The fifth pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK_C, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA_C.
15th and 16th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-/2, 17th and 18th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-/1, 19th and 20th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-2, 21st and 22nd pins are each terminal of the motor drive signal MOT5-1.
The second pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv6, and the first pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv5.

Incidentally, conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1K and CN2K are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

On the back left relay board 720, the ground terminals of the 7th pin, 13th pin, 14th pin, 19th pin, and 20th pin of connector CN1K are connected to the 4th pin, 7th pin, and 10th pin on the connector CN2K side. The 3-pin connector has been converted from a 24-pin connector to a 22-pin connector. This reduces the number of terminals of the connector CN2D to the downstream side.

[5.12 Decorative board 740]

The decorative substrate 740 will be explained using FIG. 43.
The decorative board 740 is equipped with connectors CN1L, CN2L, CN3L, CN4L, CN5L, and CN6L.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H22 connecting between the connector CN1L and the connector CN2K of the back panel left relay board 720 in FIG. 42 is connected to the connector CN1L.
Therefore, this connector CN1L has 22 terminals from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "22", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2K described above.
Note that conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1K to CN6K are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

Connector CN2L is connected to a position detection switch of a movable object (not shown).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin becomes an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv5 from the connected position detection switch.

Connector CN3L is connected to another position detection switch of a movable object (not shown).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin becomes an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv6 from the connected position detection switch.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H23 connecting between the connector CN4L and the relay board 760 shown in FIG. 11 is connected to the connector CN4L. It has a 14-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 14th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "14".

The 1st pin, the 2nd pin, and the 3rd pin are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied, and the 12th pin, the 13th pin, and the 14th pin are terminals to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied.
The 4th pin, 5th pin, 7th pin, 8th pin, 10th pin, and 11th pin are connected to ground.
The sixth pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK_C, and the ninth pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA_C.
A flexible cable (for example, a flexible flat cable) is connected to the connector CN4L as the transmission line H23, but since the rated current of the flexible cable is small, the number of power supply terminals and ground terminals is greater than that of the connector CN1L.

Connector CN5L is connected to a motor of a movable object (not shown).
The third and fourth pins are terminals to which a 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V) is applied.
The 1st pin is the motor drive signal MOT5-/2, the 2nd pin is the motor drive signal MOT5-/1, the 5th pin is the motor drive signal MOT5-2, and the 6th pin is the motor drive signal MOT5-1. Ru.

Connector CN6L is connected to an LED board of a movable object (not shown).
The first pin and the second pin are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied.
The 3rd pin to the 24th pin are light emission drive current terminals for 22 systems of light emission drive currents 09-R1, 09-G1, 09-B1...09-R8, and 09-G8.

A buffer circuit 741 which is a triple buffer gate is mounted on this decorative substrate 740. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used. A 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 6th pin of the connector CN1L.

Further, an LED driver 742 is mounted, and a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) is used as a power supply voltage for this. 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the 8th and 9th pins of the connector CN1L.

Note that the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V) supplied downstream from the connector CN5L is obtained from the 11th to 14th pins of the connector CN1L.

The flow of various signals on the decorative board 740 will be explained.
The clock signal CLK_C and data signal DATA_C supplied to the connector CN1L from the upstream back panel left relay board 720 are input to the buffer circuit 741 and buffered. The signal is then sent to connector CN4L and transmitted to downstream relay board 760.

The clock signal CLK_C and data signal DATA_C are also supplied to the LED driver 742.
The LED driver 742 drives 22 systems of LED light emission using output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . . . LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDR8, LEDG8 for light emission drive current.
These output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDR8, LEDG8 are connected to the 3rd pin to the 24th pin of the connector CN6L, and are connected to the 22 systems of LED circuits on the LED board of the movable object (not shown). The configuration is such that a light emission driving current (09-R1, 09-G1, 09-B1...09-R6, 09-G6, 09-B6) is passed through the LEDs.

As described above, the decorative substrate 740 has the following configuration.
- Transfer the clock signal CLK_C and data signal DATA_C transmitted from the upstream side to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703.
- The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA are also used by the LED driver 742. The LED driver 742 drives the light emitting parts of other LED boards to emit light.

- Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5V) through connector CN1L and uses it as an operating power source.
- 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) are supplied to the downstream side as operating power supply voltages.

In addition to those mentioned above, on the decorative board 740, as shown in FIG. 43, electronic elements such as resistors R1L, R2L, . . . , capacitors C1L, C2L, . . . are connected at required locations.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1L and TP2L are provided and used for connection to required locations.

[5.13 Relay board 760]

The configuration of the relay board 760 is shown in FIG. Connectors CN1M, CN2M, and CN3M are mounted on the relay board 760.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H23 connecting between the connector CN1M and the connector CN4L of the decorative board 740 in FIG. 43 is connected.
Therefore, this connector CN1M has 14 terminals from the 1st pin to the 14th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "14", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN4L described above.

Connector CN2M is connected to an LED board (not shown).
The fourth pin and the sixth pin are used as ground terminals.
The fifth pin is a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) terminal.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal.
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H24 that connects the downstream LED board 780 is connected to the connector CN3M.
This connector CN1B has a six-terminal configuration from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "6".
The fourth pin and the sixth pin are used as ground terminals.
The fifth pin is a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) terminal.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal.
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA.

Note that conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1M, CN2M, and CN3M are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

This relay board 760 is equipped with a buffer circuit 761 which is a Schmitt trigger buffer containing eight CMOS circuits, similar to the buffer circuit 402 in FIG. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used. 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 12th pin, 13th pin, and 14th pin of connector CN1M.

The clock signal CLK_C and data signal DATA_C supplied from the upstream decorative board 740 to the connector CN1M are input to the A1 terminal and A2 terminal of the buffer circuit 761, and are subjected to signal compensation. Then, it is outputted from the Y1 terminal and the Y2 terminal, and transmitted to the downstream side as a clock signal CLK and a data signal DATA by the connector CN2M.
Further, the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C are also input to the A5 terminal and the A6 terminal of the buffer circuit 761, and the signals are compensated. Then, it is output from the Y5 terminal and the Y6 terminal, and is transmitted to the downstream LED board 780 as a clock signal CLK and a data signal DATA by the connector CN3M.

Therefore, the decorative board 740 buffers the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C, and then sends them to the two downstream LED boards (LED board 780 and an unillustrated LED board).

[5.14 LED board 780]

FIG. 45 shows the configuration of the LED board 780. Connectors CN1N and CN2N are mounted on the LED board 780.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H24 that connects the connector CN1N to the connector CN3M of the relay board 760 in FIG. 44 is connected to the connector CN1N.
Therefore, this connector CN1N has a 6-terminal configuration from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "6", and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN3M described above.

Connector CN2N is connected to an LED board (not shown).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal.
The fourth pin is used as a ground terminal.
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA.

Note that conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1N and CN2N are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

A buffer circuit 781 which is a triple buffer gate is mounted on the LED board 780. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used. A 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the fifth pin of the connector CN1N.

Furthermore, an LED driver 782 is mounted, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for this. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the first pin of the connector CN1N.

The flow of various signals in the LED board 780 will be explained.
The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA supplied from the upstream relay board 760 to the connector CN1N are input to the buffer circuit 781 and buffered. The signal is then sent to connector CN2N and transmitted to the downstream LED board 790.

The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA are also supplied to the LED driver 782.
The LED driver 782 drives 22 systems of LED light emission using the light emission drive current output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, LEDR8.
These output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1...LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, LEDR8 are connected to each of the 22 systems of LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 783, and the light emitting drive current (03-R1, 03-G1, 03-B1...03-G7, 03-B7, 03-R8).
As shown in the figure, each system of LED circuits of the light emitting section 783 is composed of two or three LEDs (LED1, LED2, . . . ) connected in series and a resistance element. The LED circuits of each system are connected in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

As described above, the LED board 780 has the following configuration.
- Transfers the clock signal CLK and data signal DATA transmitted from the upstream side to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 781.
- The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA are also used by the LED driver 782 to drive the light emitting section 783 to emit light.

- Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5V) through connector CN1N and uses it as an operating power source.
- 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the downstream side as the operating power supply voltage.

In addition to those mentioned above, on the LED board 780, as shown in FIG. 45, electronic elements such as resistors R1N, R2N, . . . , capacitors C1N, C2N, . . . are connected at required locations.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1N and TP2N are provided and used for connection to required locations.

Incidentally, although illustration of the LED board 790 downstream of this LED board 780 is omitted, roughly speaking, the configuration is such that the buffer circuit 781 and connector CN2N are removed from the LED board 780. That is, the LED board 790 has an LED driver and a light emitting section, and is configured to drive the LED light emission based on the input clock signal CLK and data signal DATA.
An LED driver and an LED are mounted on the LED board 790, but a buffer circuit is not mounted thereon. Therefore, only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from connector CN2N to LED board 790, and 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. That is, the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied to the LED board 780 where the buffer circuit is provided based on the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the production control board 30 (see the 6th pin of the connector CN1J in FIG. 36). The configuration is as follows.

[5.15 Lower back relay board 800]

FIG. 46 shows the structure of the lower relay board 800. Connectors CN1Q, CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q are mounted on the relay board 800 under the back of the panel.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H30 connecting between the connector CN1Q and the connector CN11J of the LED connection board 700 in FIG. 40 is connected to the connector CN1Q.
Therefore, this connector CN1Q has a 16-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "16", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN11J described above.

Connector CN2Q is connected to movable motor 830 (see FIG. 58).
The third and fourth pins are terminals to which a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied.
The 1st pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-/2, the 2nd pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-/1, the 5th pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-2, and the 6th pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-1. Ru.

The transmission line end of the transmission line H31 that connects the downstream decorative board 820 is connected to the connector CN3Q.
This connector CN3Q has a 10-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 10th pin as indicated by numbers "1" to "10".
The first to sixth pins are terminals for 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB).
The 7th pin, 8th pin, 9th pin, and 10th pin are terminals for light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8.
A flexible cable (for example, a flexible flat cable) is connected to this connector CN3Q as a transmission line H31, and since the rated current is small, the number of power supply terminals is larger than that of other connectors. For example, the number of terminals (six) for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of connector CN3Q is greater than the number of terminals (two) for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of connector CN1Q.

Connector CN4Q is connected to position detection switch 831 (see FIG. 58).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. The second pin becomes an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv7 from the connected position detection switch.

Note that conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1Q, CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q are connected to the ground for the purpose of mounting strength.

In this panel back lower relay board 800, signals and voltages supplied through connector CN1Q are distributed downstream through connectors CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q.
In connector CN1Q, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is inputted through two terminals, 4th pin and 6th pin, but in connector CN3Q, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is input downstream through 6 terminals from 1st pin to 6th pin. Sending. As a result, the number of downstream terminals (the total number of terminals of connectors CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q) is greater than the number of upstream terminals (the number of terminals of connector CN1Q).

[5.16 Decorative board 820]

The decorative substrate 820 will be explained using FIG. 47.
A connector CN1S is mounted on the decorative board 820.
The transmission line end of the transmission line H31 connecting between the connector CN1S and the connector CN3Q of the lower board relay board 800 in FIG. 46 is connected to the connector CN1S.
Therefore, this connector CN1S has a 10-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 10th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "10", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN3Q described above.

The decorative board 820 is provided with a light emitting section 821 having four LED circuits, each of which is driven to emit light by a light emitting drive current 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, 13-B8 via a connector CN1S. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied through the connector CN1S is applied to the anode side of the LED of the light emitting section 821.
This decorative board 820 is placed inside a movable body (not shown), and serves as a board for emitting LED light from a portion of the movable body.

<6. Explanation of notable configurations＞

Hereinafter, notable configurations among the configurations of the gaming machine 1 described so far will be sequentially explained.

[6.1 Serial data signal between inner frame 2 and door 6]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A1-1).
(Configuration A1-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a plurality of detection means attached to the door 6, and a plurality of detection means attached to the door 6. The first board is configured to convert each detection signal of the plurality of detection means into a serial data signal and transmit the serial data signal to another board.

In the case of this (configuration A1-1) concept, examples of the first board include the front frame LED connection board 500, the side unit upper right LED board 600, or the LED connection board 700.
The detection signals are sense signals SENS0 to SENS14, sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9, etc., and therefore, the plurality of detection means are devices that generate these sense signals. Specifically, they include switches such as position detection switches, performance operation means such as the performance button 13, cross key 15a, and decision button 15b, and sensors such as touch sensors.

The first board converts a plurality of detection signals from various detection means such as switches, buttons, sensors, etc. into serial data signals and outputs the serial data signals, thereby reducing the number of wirings for sense signals.
Furthermore, even if the door 6 is provided with a large number of sensors, switches, etc., it is possible to prevent the number of wires from becoming enormous. In other words, it is possible to arrange abundant production means and detection means on the door 6 closest to the player without complicating the wiring configuration.

Here are some specific examples. The front frame LED connection board 500 shown in FIGS. 15 to 22 converts the data into serial data using the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506, as mainly explained with reference to FIGS. 18 and 22. The resulting serial data signal S_IN_DATA is then transmitted to the inner frame LED relay board 400 via the transmission line H8.
Thereby, the number of wiring lines of the transmission line H8 can be reduced. In particular, the front frame LED connection board 500 collects the serial data signal from the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, SENS14, and also collects the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 and converts them into serial data. The effect of reducing the number of wires is significant.

Further, the side unit upper right LED board 600 shown in FIGS. 24 to 29 converts the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X into serial data using the P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 in FIG. 25. The resulting serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is sent to the relay board 550 via the transmission line H10, and further sent to the front frame LED connection board 500 via the transmission line H9.
This makes it possible to reduce the number of transmission lines H9 and H10.

Further, the LED connection board 700 shown in FIGS. 36 to 41 converts the sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9 into serial data using the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 shown in FIG. Then, the resulting serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA is transmitted to the production control board 30 via the transmission line H20.
This allows the number of wiring lines of the transmission line H20 to be reduced.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A1-2) in addition to (configuration A1-1).
(Configuration A1-2)
The other board that transmits the serial data signal is a board attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member).

In the case of this (configuration A1-2) concept, the example corresponding to the first board is the front frame LED connection board 500, and the other board is the inner frame LED relay board 400.
The front frame LED connection board 500 and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are electrically connected by a transmission line H8 with the door 6 open as shown in FIG.
In this case, by converting the front frame LED connection board 500 into serial data as described above, a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wires in the harness (transmission line H8) that connects the wires of the opening/closing part of the door 6. This means that it can be transmitted. This avoids excessive wiring in the movable parts. Furthermore, by reducing the number of wires, it becomes easier to improve the flexibility, durability, and reliability of the harness, making it easier to realize suitable wiring in movable parts.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-1).
(Configuration A2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a plurality of first detection means attached to the door 6, and a door. 6, and a second board attached below the first board in the door 6, the first board converts the detection signals of each of the plurality of detection means into serial data. The configuration is such that the signal is converted into a signal and transmitted to the second board.
The plurality of first detection means and the first substrate are attached to the upper region of the door 6, for example.

In the case of the concept of this (configuration A2-1), the following can be considered as an example corresponding to the first board and the second board.
・First board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
Note that "transmitting to the second board" includes both direct transmission to the second board and transmission to the second board via another board.

Moreover, as an example corresponding to the first detection means, detection means such as a sensor that generates the sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C can be cited. These detection means are arranged in the upper region of the door 6. The upper area of the door 6 refers to the area above the bottom line UL of the game board 3 shown in FIG. 10, for example, in the vertical direction of the door 6.

Sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are detection signals obtained by photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F arranged on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit in FIG. 30. These sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are input from connector CN3E to connector CN3E of the upper right side unit LED board 600 in FIG. 26.
Photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are shown in FIG. 10, and these are sensors for determining the operating state of the movable object moved by the lower right side unit movable object motor 103.

The sense signal SENS1X is a detection signal generated by the side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102 shown in FIG. This sense signal SENS1X is input from connector CN3E via connectors CN4F and CN3F in FIG. 30 to connector CN3E of the upper right side unit LED board 600 in FIG. 26.

The sense signal SENS2X is input from the connector CN7E in FIG. 25 to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. Connector CN7E is connected to the sensor of side unit device 101 shown in FIG.

The detection means (photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, PC3F, side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102, side unit device 101 sensor) that generate these sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C are all located on the door. It is placed at the top (above the bottom line UL).

Therefore, as an example corresponding to the first board, the side unit upper right LED board 600 collects the sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C from the detection means arranged in the upper area of the door 6, converts them into serial data, and converts them into serial data. 550, it is configured to transmit toward the front frame LED connection board 500 corresponding to the second board.

By converting multiple sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C that are close in arrangement into serial data in this way, multiple detections by various detection means such as sensors, switches, and buttons located at the top of the door 6 can be performed. Signals can be efficiently converted into serial data signals, the wiring efficiency for detection signals from various places can be improved, the number of wiring lines can be reduced, and the wiring length can be shortened.

Note that in the configuration having the relay board 550 as shown in FIG. 11, the side unit upper right LED board 600 transmits the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx to the front frame LED connection board 500 via the relay board 550. Of course, the configuration may be such that the information is directly transmitted from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit to the front frame LED connection board 500.

In addition, "the upper part of the door 6" is not defined as above the bottom line UL, but means, for example, above the vertical center line of the door 6, and in that case, it is defined as above the vertical center line of the door 6. It is also possible to consider a configuration in which the detection signals are collectively converted into serial data on the upper board.
Furthermore, the term "left side of the door 6" refers to the left side of the center line in the left-right direction of the door 6, and in that case, the detection signals of the plurality of detection means on the left side of the door 6 are detected by the board on the left side. It is also possible to consider a configuration in which all data are converted into serial data.
Furthermore, the term "right part of the door 6" means the part to the right of the center line in the left-right direction of the door 6, and in that case, the detection signals of the plurality of detection means on the right part of the door 6 are It is also possible to consider a configuration in which all data are converted into serial data.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-2) in addition to (configuration A2-1).
(Configuration A2-2)
The gaming machine 1 includes a third board attached to an inner frame 2 (frame member), and one or more second detection means attached to a door 6 (door member) below the first detection means. The second board is configured to collectively convert the detection signal of the second detection means and the serial data signal from the first board into a serial data signal, and transmit the serial data signal to the third board. has been done.

in this case,
・First board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Third board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
You can think about it.
In other words, in addition to converting the side unit upper right LED board 600, which corresponds to the first board, into serial data, the front frame LED connection board 500, which corresponds to the second board, also performs serial data conversion, and the inner frame LED relay The configuration is such that the information is transmitted to the board 400.

Examples of the second detection means include detection means such as switches that generate sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14.
These detection means are arranged below the detection means that generate the above-mentioned sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C.

The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are detection signals generated by detection means such as operation detection switches such as the cross key 15a and the enter button 15b. The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are input to the front frame LED connection board 500 from the connector CN7C in FIG.

The sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 are input from the button LED connection board 640 to the front frame LED connection board 500.
The sense signal SENS8 is a detection signal generated by a push button sensor in the production button 13, for example.
The sense signal SENS9 is, for example, a detection signal generated by a rotation origin sensor within the production button 13.
The sense signal SENS11 is, for example, a detection signal generated by a rotating effect light sensor in the effect button 13.

The sense signal SENS14 is a detection signal generated by a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 and input to the front frame LED connection board 500 via the connector CN9C.

The front frame LED connection board 500 uses the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 shown in FIG. and convert them into serial data. Then, it is outputted to the production control board 30 as a serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500.
Therefore, a plurality of detection signals from various detection means such as sensors, switches, and buttons present in the upper area of the door are collected by the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and furthermore, detection signals from detection means located below these are collected by the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. The front frame LED connection board 500 is arranged below the LED board 600.

In this way, by converting serial data in stages on each board according to the position of the detection means, it is possible to efficiently convert the detection signals of the detection means located at the top and bottom of the door into serial data signals. This makes it possible to improve wiring efficiency for detection signals from various locations and to reduce the number of wiring lines. Also, the wiring length can be shortened.
Moreover, this allows a large amount of detection signals to be transmitted with a small number of wires in the harness (transmission line H8) that connects the wires of the opening/closing portion of the door.
Thereby, even when a large number of detection means are mounted on the door 6, the reliability of the wiring in the movable part can be improved.

In this example, as an example corresponding to the second detection means, a plurality of detection means such as switches that generate the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 are cited, but the second detection means (Configuration A2-2) is useful even if it is single.
For example, the front frame LED connection board 500 is configured to combine one sense signal with the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit into serial data, and output it as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA to the production control board 30. can also be considered.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-3) in addition to (configuration A2-1) or (configuration A2-2).
(Configuration A2-3)
The second board includes a first buffer circuit that buffers the serial data signal from the first board, and a serial data signal output from the first buffer circuit and a detection signal of the second detection means. a second buffer circuit that performs buffer processing on the serial data signal obtained by the conversion means; and a second buffer circuit that performs buffer processing on the serial data signal obtained by the second buffer circuit; and output means for transmitting data to the third board.

Examples corresponding to the first buffer circuit, second buffer circuit, output means, and conversion means can be considered as follows.
- First buffer circuit: buffer circuit 502 shown in FIGS. 17 and 22
- Second buffer circuit: buffer circuit 513 shown in FIGS. 18 and 22.
・Output means: Connector CN2C shown in Figure 15
・Conversion means: The circuit shown in FIG. 18 includes a P/S conversion circuit 505 and a P/S conversion circuit 506.

In this case, it is possible to compensate for the attenuation of the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx transmitted by the buffer circuit 502, thereby improving the stability of the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from downstream. In this state, the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 can collectively convert the data into serial data. Further, by performing buffer processing in the buffer circuit 513, signal compensation for transmitting the serial data signal S_IN_DATA can be performed.
As described above, it is possible to convert the data into serial data after ensuring stable data, and to maintain the signal quality of the serial data sent to the production control board 30.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A3-1).
(Configuration A3-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a decoration unit attached to the door 6, and a decoration unit attached to the decoration unit. a plurality of first detection means, a first substrate attached to the decoration unit, and a second substrate attached to a portion of the door 6 that is outside the decoration unit; The detection signal of each of the plurality of first detection means is converted into a serial data signal and transmitted to the second board.
For example, the decorative unit is attached to the door 6 in a replaceable manner.

In the case of this (configuration A3-1) concept, the side unit 10 can be cited as an example corresponding to the decorative unit.
An example of the first board is the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and an example of the second board is the front frame LED connection board 500.
A front frame LED connection board 500 is provided on the door 6 but not within the side unit 10.
The side unit upper right LED board 600, which is the first board, transmits a serial data signal S_IN_DATAx toward the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the second board (via the relay board 550). Note that, of course, a configuration may be adopted in which the relay board 550 is not present and direct transmission is performed.

The first detection means is a plurality of detection signals attached to the side unit 10, and corresponds to the detection means that generates the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X.
The detection means that generate the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F shown in FIGS. 10 and 30.
The detection means for generating the sense signal SENS1X is the side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102 (see FIG. 10), which is connected to the connector CN4F in FIG. 30.
The detection means that generates the sense signal SENS2X is the side unit device 101 (see FIG. 10) connected to the connector CN7E in FIG. , the side unit device 101 is provided within the side unit 10.

When the side unit 10 is replaceable with respect to the door 6, a sensor, a switch, a button, etc. are also provided inside the side unit 10 as a board and detection means, and signal transmission is performed between the board and the board on the door 6 side. be exposed.
In this case, the side unit upper right LED board 600 (first board) disposed in the side unit 10 receives a plurality of sense signals SENS_A from various first detection means such as switches, buttons, and sensors of the side unit 10. SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X are converted into serial data signals S_IN_DATAx and outputted to the front frame LED connection board 500 of the door 6 via the relay board 550. Thereby, the number of wires in the harnesses serving as the transmission lines H10 and H9 can be effectively reduced. In particular, since the transmission line H9 is a harness that is separated when the side unit 10 is replaced, it is desirable from a structural standpoint to reduce the number of wires and simplify the wiring.
Furthermore, even if a large number of sensors, switches, etc. are provided in the side unit 10, the number of wires can be prevented from increasing. Even if the side unit 10 is configured to perform performance operations and various detection operations corresponding thereto, it is possible to prevent the number of wires from becoming excessive.

Note that the decorative unit provided on the door 6 is not limited to the side unit 10, but also includes units such as the effect button 13, for example. That is, anything that is provided on the door 6, is replaceable with respect to the door 6, and performs decoration or presentation operations is a decoration unit here.
For example, the effect button 13 is configured as a decorative unit attached to the door 6. The detection signals of the plurality of detection means in this production button unit are converted into serial data by an internal button LED board 660, for example, and sent to a board outside the production button unit (for example, the button LED connection board 640 or the front frame LED connection board 500). A configuration is also conceivable in which the information is sent by

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A3-2) in addition to (configuration A3-1).
(Configuration A3-2)
The door 6 (door member) includes one or more second detection means attached to a portion outside the decoration unit, and the second board is configured to detect the detection signal of the second detection means and the first board. The serial data signals from the inner frame 2 (frame member) are collectively converted into serial data signals and transmitted to the third board attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member).

In the case of this (configuration A3-2), the inner frame LED relay board 400 can be cited as an example corresponding to the third board.
Examples of the second detection means include detection means such as switches that generate sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14. That is, the cross key 15a decision button 15b, the operation detection switch of the production button 13, etc., the rotation origin sensor in the production button 13, the rotation production light sensor in the production button 13, the touch sensor provided on the firing operation handle 15, etc. are the second This serves as a means of detection.

Then, in the front frame LED connection board 500, the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, SENS14 from these second detection means and the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are combined into a serial data signal. The configuration is such that the data is converted into S_IN_DATA and transmitted to the inner frame LED relay board 400 attached to the inner frame 2.
By continuously converting the detection signal inside the door 6 into serial data using the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the front frame LED connection board 500, it is possible to suppress the number of wires for transmitting from the door 6 to the inner frame 2 side. .
In particular, in the harness (transmission line H8: see FIG. 5) that connects the wiring of the opening/closing portion of the door 6, a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wirings. This increases the reliability of the wiring in the movable parts.

[6.2 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (part 1)]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B1).
(Configuration B1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line and connected to the second board through a second transmission line. a third substrate receiving a first power supply voltage, the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is equal to the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. There are more lines than the number of lines.

In the case of this (configuration B1), the following corresponding example (specific example 1) is assumed with reference to FIG.
(Specific example 1)
・First board: power supply board 300
・Second board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Third board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・First transmission line: Transmission line H3
・Second transmission line: Transmission line H8
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

In accordance with this example, transmission of the power supply voltage between the power supply board 300, the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500 is shown in FIG.

A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400 via the transmission line H3. As shown in the diagram, the transmission line H3 transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using three lines (see connector CN3A in FIG. 12 and connector CN4B in FIG. 14).
Note that the transmission line H3 is composed of six lines, and the remaining three lines are used as ground.

As shown in FIG. 48, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the front frame LED connection board 500 via the transmission line H8. As shown in the diagram, the transmission line H8 transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using four lines (see connector CN2B in FIG. 13 and connector CN2C in FIG. 15).

In addition, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, as described above, the 5V generation unit 410 (see FIG. 14) generates 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) using the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and connects the front frame LED with the transmission line H8. It is supplied to the substrate 500. As shown in the diagram, the transmission line H8 transmits a 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB) using two lines (see connector CN2B in FIG. 13 and connector CN2C in FIG. 15).
Further, in the transmission line H8, five lines are used for ground.

The front frame LED connection board 500 also supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) further downstream.
Connector CN1C transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) downstream through one line each, and two lines are used for grounding. (See Figure 16).
The transmission line H9 from connector CN3C transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the relay board 550 (and the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit) with three lines, and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) with one line. (See Figure 17). Five lines are used for ground.
Connector CN4C transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) downstream through one line (see FIG. 16).

The connector CN10C transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) to the button LED connection board 640 via a transmission line H15 (see FIG. 20). Five lines are used for ground.
In addition, in the front frame LED connection board 500, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the power separation/protection circuit 520 (see FIG. 15) as described above, and the button LED is connected by the transmission line H15. It is supplied to the substrate 640.
Note that a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated by a power supply isolation/protection circuit 521 (see FIG. 19), and is used as a power supply voltage for motor drivers 510 and 511 inside the board.

Focusing on the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), three lines are used in the transmission line H3 for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) between the power supply board 300, the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500. However, the transmission line H8 uses four lines. In other words, it has a configuration corresponding to the above-mentioned (configuration B1).

The transmission line H8 on the downstream side has more lines that use 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H3 on the upstream side, which is an advantageous configuration when it is desired to downsize the connector on the downstream side. Become.

Specifically, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, connectors CN1B and CN4B are used for connection to the upstream side, and connectors CN2B and CN3B are used for connection to the downstream side. Examples of connectors CN1B, CN2B, and CN4B are shown in FIGS. 49, 50, and 51, except for connector CN3B, which is used only for speaker connection.
Although each figure shows an example of a top type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from above while mounted on the board, a side type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from the side may also be used.

For example, the connector CN1B shown in FIG. 49 has the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 28
・Plane horizontal size S1: 30.0mm
・Plane vertical size S2: 8.3mm
・Height size S3: 9.6mm
・Rated current: 3A
・Rated voltage: 250V
・Terminal pitch: 2mm
・Contact diameter: 0.7mm

For example, the connector CN2B in FIG. 50 has the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 30
・Plane horizontal size S1: 26.2mm
・Plane vertical size S2: 7.4mm
・Height size S3: 5.55mm
・Rated current: 2A
・Rated voltage: 100V
・Terminal pitch: 1.5mm
・Contact diameter: 0.65mm

For example, the connector CN4B in FIG. 51 has the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 6
・Plane horizontal size S1: 17.5mm
・Plane vertical size S2: 6.4mm
・Height size S3: 8.8mm
・Rated current: 3A
・Rated voltage: 250V
・Terminal pitch: 2.5mm
・Contact diameter: 0.9mm

From the above, it can be seen that the downstream connector CN2B is downsized.
Note that the contact diameter is the pin terminal diameter in the case of a male connector, and the corresponding pin terminal diameter in the case of a female connector.

Connector CN2B and transmission line H8 are used to communicate with the downstream side various signals transmitted between the upstream side, transmission line H7, and connector CN1B, and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied by transmission line H3 and connector CN4B. In this case, it is generally considered that the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 are required to have the same rated current and voltage. It is assumed that the connectors will be approximately the same size.
In contrast, in this embodiment, 4 pins and 4 lines are used for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), especially in the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8. This reduces the current load on one pin, making it possible to use the connector CN2B, which is small and has a low rated current as described above. By being able to employ a small-sized connector, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is effective in expanding the layout margin on the board, improving the degree of freedom in design, or reducing the size of the board.

Further, as a result, the connector CN2C of the front frame LED connection board 500 can be similarly small and have a small rated current, and the same effect can be obtained.

By the way, as a specific example corresponding to the above (configuration B1), the following (specific example 2) can also be considered.
(Specific example 2)
・First board: LED connection board 700
・Second board: Lower relay board 800
・Third board: decorative board 820
・First transmission line: Transmission line H30
・Second transmission line: Transmission line H31
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

As shown in FIG. 46, the connector CN1Q (and transmission line H30) of the lower relay board 800 uses two lines for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), while the connector CN3Q (and transmission line H31) uses six lines for 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB).
The transmission line H31 on the downstream side has more lines that use 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H30 on the upstream side, which is an advantageous configuration when it is desired to downsize the connector on the downstream side. Become.

Specifically, an example of the connectors CN1Q and CN3Q of the lower panel relay board 800 is shown in FIGS. 52 and 53.
Although each figure shows an example of a side type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from the side while mounted on the board, a top type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from above may also be used.

For example, the connector CN1Q in FIG. 52 has the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 16
・Plane horizontal size S1: 10.2mm
・Plane vertical size S2: 5.1mm
・Height size S3: 6.1mm
・Rated current: 1.0A
・Rated voltage: 50V
・Terminal pitch: 1mm

For example, the connector CN3Q in FIG. 53 has the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 10
・Plane horizontal size S1: 10.9mm
・Plane vertical size S2: 4.5mm
・Height size S3: 2.0mm
・Rated current: 0.5A
・Rated voltage: 50V
・Terminal pitch: 0.5mm

From the above, it can be seen that the downstream connector CN3Q is downsized.
That is, by using 6 pins and 6 lines for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in connector CN3Q and transmission line H31, the current burden on one pin is reduced, and as mentioned above, the connector CN3Q is small and has a low rated current. This makes it possible to employ The ability to employ a small connector is effective in expanding the layout margin on the board, improving the degree of freedom in design, or downsizing the board in the backside relay board 800.

Further, as a result, the connector CN1S of the decorative board 820 can be similarly small and have a low rated current, and the same effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B2-1).
(Configuration B2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a first board attached to the inner frame 2, and a door 6 attached to the inner frame 2. a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage; a third substrate receiving supply of power supply voltage, the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is a line for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. There have been more than a few.

In this case, examples corresponding to the first substrate, second substrate, third substrate, first transmission line, second transmission line, and first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 1) of (configuration B1) above. .

In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the third board, is placed on the door 6, and the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, is placed on the inner frame 2, so the transmission line that is the second transmission line H8 is a harness that connects the opening/closing portion of the door 6 as shown in FIG.
The connectors CN2B and CN2C that connect both ends of the transmission line H8 have the specifications shown in FIG. 50. As mentioned above, this is a relatively small connector.

Reducing the size of the connectors CN2B and CN2C, which are the ends of the opening/closing portion of the door 6, is extremely effective in creating a space that does not interfere with the opening/closing operation.
It is desirable that the connectors CN2B and CN2C be exposed in the opening/closing space in order to avoid applying excessive force to the transmission line H8. If the connectors CN2B and CN2C are large in size, they are likely to be subject to restrictions not only in the placement of the board on which the connectors CN2B and CN2C are mounted, but also in the placement of peripheral components, and unnecessary protrusions may be caused when the door 6 is opened and closed. It is easy to form. The connector connection area is electrically fragile, so avoid structures that protrude and are susceptible to external pressure. This further limits the degree of freedom in design.

In this embodiment, by increasing the number of lines used for transmitting 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H3, the connectors CN2B and CN2C can be miniaturized for the reason explained above (configuration B1). This makes it suitable as a connector for use in the opening/closing part of the door 6, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design and reduce electrical fragility by reducing protrusions.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B2-2) in addition to (configuration B2-1).
(Configuration B2-2)
The connector used for the second transmission line has a smaller external size than the connector used for the first transmission line.

That is, as described above for sizes S1, S2, and S3, the housing size of connector CN2B is smaller than the housing size of connector CN1B.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side is a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, it is advantageous for reducing the size of downstream substrates.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B3).
(Configuration B3)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a board area smaller than that of the first board and the second board. a third substrate that is small and connected to the second substrate through a second transmission line to receive the first power supply voltage, and used for transmitting the first power supply voltage on the second transmission line. The number of lines is greater than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

Examples corresponding to the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 1) of the above (configuration B1).

In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the third board, is smaller in size than the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, and the power supply board 300, which is the first board.
FIG. 8 shows the front frame LED connection board 500, and FIG. 9 shows the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the power supply board 300. Since FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are drawn to the same scale, as can be seen by comparison, the front frame LED connection board 500 has a larger board area (mounting surface on the board surface) than the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the power supply board 300. area) is small.
That is, the front frame LED connection board 500 has a relatively small margin for arranging electronic components.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) lines is made larger in the connector CN2B of the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the transmission line H8 than in the transmission line H3 on the upstream side, and the connector CN2B is made smaller. In turn, this makes it possible to downsize the connector CN2C. This makes it possible to reduce the connector mounting area in the front frame LED connection board 500 and reduce the burden on board layout. Conversely, the front frame LED connection board 500 can be realized with a small board.

In particular, the front frame LED connection board 500 is placed on the door 6, and in order to reduce the weight of the door 6, it is desirable that the board and mounting components be as light as possible. It is advantageous in that respect as well.
In addition, sensors, motors, effect button units, etc. tend to be clustered in the lower part of the door 6, so it is desirable that the boards and components placed there be as small as possible. This configuration is also advantageous in this respect.
Of course, since the connector CN2C can be a small connector, the height size S3 of the board on which components are mounted can also be kept low.

Although the third substrate is smaller in area than the first and second substrates, it may be smaller in volume, including the thickness of the substrate, than the first and second substrates.
Further, the space volume required for the arrangement, including the height when electronic components are mounted, of the third substrate may be smaller than that of the first and second substrates.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B4).
(Configuration B4)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and arranged inside a movable body, and connected to the first board through a first transmission line. a third substrate connected to a second substrate to receive the first power supply voltage, the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is equal to The number of lines is greater than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage.

In this case, examples corresponding to the first substrate, second substrate, third substrate, first transmission line, second transmission line, and first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 2) of (configuration B1) above. be able to.

The decorative board 820, which is the third board, is attached to a movable body (not shown) disposed at the lower front, and is a board on which a large number of LEDs are mounted as shown in FIG. 47, and which emits LED light in the movable body. .
Furthermore, the transmission line H31 becomes a member that electrically connects the movable parts.

The connector CN3Q of the backside relay board 800, which is the second board, is a small connector as shown in FIG. 53 described above. Therefore, the connector CN1S of the decorative board 820 also becomes the connector shown in FIG. 53.

In other words, in this embodiment, by increasing the number of lines used for transmitting 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H3, connector CN3Q, CN1S can be made smaller.
This makes the connector CN1S suitable for mounting on a board within the movable body. This is because it is desirable that the decorative board 820 mounted on the movable body be small, and therefore it is desirable that the mounted parts, especially the connectors occupying a large area, be small.
Therefore, (configuration B4) allows the decorative board 820 mounted on the movable body to have an appropriate board size.
Furthermore, by making the connector CN1S smaller, the degree of freedom in mounting LEDs increases, making it suitable for designing light emitting positions for production.

Further, although the connector CN1S is a component with a high height on the board, a relatively low connector CN1S can be used. In the case of a movable object, it is desirable to use a substrate with as little height as possible. This is due to reasons such as the desire to prevent it from interfering with movement, and the desire to place it inside a movable object as much as possible. Therefore, it is effective to use a connector with a low height size S3. In this sense, a side-type connector as shown in FIG. 53 is also more desirable than a top-type connector.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B5).
(Configuration B5)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line and connected to the second board through a second transmission line. a third substrate receiving a first power supply voltage, the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is equal to the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. The number of lines is greater than the number of lines, and the second transmission line is formed of a flexible cable.

In this case, examples corresponding to the first substrate, second substrate, third substrate, first transmission line, second transmission line, and first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 2) of (configuration B1) above. be able to.

Furthermore, the flexible cable refers to FFC (flexible flat cable) and FPC (flexible printed circuit board).
Particularly in this case, a flexible cable is used for the transmission line H31 that connects the bottom relay board 800, which is the second board, and the decorative board 820, which is the third board.
As can be seen from the assignment of connector CN1S in Figure 47, the flexible cable of transmission line H31 transmits only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8. There is.
Further, a flexible cable is also used for the transmission line H23 connecting the decorative board 740 and the relay board 760 attached to the movable accessory. As can be seen from the pin assignment of connector CN4L in FIG. 43, transmission line H23 transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5V), clock signal CLK_C, and data signal DATA_C.

In addition, as mentioned above, the transmission line H used in various places is not limited to a flexible cable, and may be a combination of a plurality of conductive wire materials, for example, but in particular, here, it is assumed that the transmission line H31 is a flexible cable. .
Of course, since the decorative board 820 is placed on a movable member and the transmission line H31 moves within a predetermined stroke range, it is preferable to use a flexible cable.

However, in the case of flexible cables, the current that can be passed through one line is small.
Therefore, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) received by two lines from the transmission line H30 through the connector CN1Q on the relay board 800 under the back of the panel is transferred to the decorative board 820 using six lines at the connector CN3Q and the transmission line H31. supplying. As a result, sufficient power can be supplied even when a flexible cable is used, and appropriate LED light emission can be realized in the decorative board 820.
In addition, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) received by two lines from the transmission line H22 through the connector CN1L on the decorative board 740 is supplied to the relay board 760 using three lines at the connector CN4L and the transmission line H23. There is. Similarly, the 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) received through one line from the connector CN1L is supplied to the relay board 760 using three lines at the connector CN4L and the transmission line H23. As a result, even if a flexible cable is used, sufficient power is supplied to the relay board 760 and subsequent parts.
As can be seen from FIGS. 43 and 44, in the transmission line H23, the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C are transmitted through one line. In other words, when using a flexible cable, the number of lines for power supply is increased compared to a normal harness, but the clock and control data signals are carried out using only one line.

Note that this (configuration B5) is also effective when a flexible cable is used for the transmission line H8. In other words, it is also applicable as (Specific Example 1) of the above (Configuration B1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B6-1).
(Configuration B6-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line and connected to the second board through a second transmission line. a third substrate receiving a first power supply voltage, the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is equal to the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. The number of lines is greater than the number of lines, and the second board generates a second power supply voltage using the first power supply voltage, and the third board generates the second power supply voltage using the second transmission line. It is said that the structure will also receive the supply of

Examples corresponding to the first substrate, second substrate, third substrate, first transmission line, second transmission line, and first power supply voltage can be the same as (specific example 1) of (configuration B1) above. .
An example of the second power supply voltage may be a 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB).

In this case, the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, includes a 5V generation section 410 (see FIG. 14), and generates a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
This 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is supplied to the front frame LED connection board 500 from the connector CN2B in FIG. 13 through the transmission line H8.

As shown in (configuration B1) above, for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), the transmission line H8 uses more lines than the transmission line H3, making it possible to downsize the connectors CN2B and CN2C. At the same time, a 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB) is transmitted separately.

When not only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) but also 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is used on a downstream board after the front frame LED connection board 500 provided on the door 6, the inner frame LED relay board 400 located upstream of the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) By generating and supplying 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB), wiring and circuit configuration for power supply can be made more efficient.
That is, it is not necessary to transmit 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400, and furthermore, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for each board of the door 6. There is no need to adopt a configuration that does.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B6-2) in addition to (configuration B6-1).
(Configuration B6-2)
A buffer circuit is mounted on the second substrate, and the second power supply voltage is used as a power supply voltage of the buffer circuit.

Buffer circuits 402 and 403 in FIG. 13 are examples of the buffer circuits mentioned here.
The buffer circuits 402 and 403 operate using the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated by the 5V generation unit 410 of the inner frame LED relay board 400 as a power supply voltage.

In other words, the reason why the 5V generation unit 410 is provided in the inner frame LED relay board 400 to generate the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is to generate the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) at the inner frame LED relay board 400 and its downstream. By using.
In other words, since 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is used downstream after the inner frame LED relay board 400, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated at the most upstream board within the usage range of the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). do. Then, a configuration is adopted in which a 5V direct current voltage (DC5VB) is transmitted to a downstream board that uses the power supply voltage.

For example, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400 is applied to the front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, the side unit upper right LED board 600, the side unit lower right LED board 620, and the button LED connection board 640. used in
In each figure, there are places where it is written as "5V DC voltage (DC5V)", but as is clear from the circuit configuration, 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is also the 5V DC voltage generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400. (DC5VB).
On the other hand, since the button LED board 660 does not use a 5V power supply, 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is not supplied (see FIG. 34).

Thereby, the wiring and circuit configuration for supplying 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) can be made more efficient.
In other words, the configuration is such that the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is spread across the range of the board that uses the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from upstream to downstream. Therefore, there is no need to generate or relay a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) on unused boards upstream of the inner frame LED relay board 400. Of course, it is not necessary to adopt a configuration in which 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated from 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for each board of the door 6.

[6.3 Connector structure]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C1).
(Configuration C1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line, A first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board and a second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board are different types of connectors.

In the case of this (configuration C1), the following corresponding example (specific example 3) is assumed.
(Specific example 3)
・First board: frame LED relay board 840
・Second board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Third board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・First transmission line: Transmission line H7
・Second transmission line: Transmission line H8
・First connector: Connector CN1B
・Second connector: Connector CN2B

The connectors CN1B and CN2B in this case are shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and their specifications are also as described above, and different types are used. In particular, the connector CN2B that connects the downstream side is smaller than the connector CN1B that connects the upstream side.
That is, in the frame LED relay board 840 , inner frame LED relay board 400, and front frame LED connection board 500 that are electrically connected from upstream to downstream, the inner frame LED relay board 400 has an upstream connector CN1B and a downstream connector. By using different types of CN2B, it is possible to downsize the substrate on the downstream side, which is advantageous in arranging components such as the substrate on the downstream side.

In particular, on the downstream side, it is desirable to place boards for controlling and relaying these devices close to the most downstream devices, such as motors, sensors, LED boards, etc. Of course, they are often close to movable animals. Therefore, it is desirable that the substrate area be as small as possible. Therefore, being able to reduce the substrate size on the downstream side leads to increased design freedom. Further, it is possible to realize a board suitable even when using a complicated presentation device structure.

Note that the specific example corresponding to (configuration C1) is not limited to the above (specific example 3). For example, the following substrates (and connectors) can be exemplified as examples corresponding to the second substrate including different types of first connectors and second connectors.

- Front frame LED connection board 500 (upstream connector CN2C and other downstream connectors)
- Relay board 550 (upstream connector CN1D and downstream connector CN2D)
・Side unit upper right LED board 600 (upstream connector CN1E and other downstream connectors)
・Side unit lower right LED board 620 (upstream connector CN3F and other downstream connectors)
・Button LED connection board 640 (upstream connector CN1G and other downstream connectors)
・LED connection board 700 (upstream connector CN1J and other downstream connectors)
- Decorative board 740 (upstream connector CN1L and other downstream connectors)
・Relay board 760 (upstream connector CN1M and other downstream connectors)
・LED board 780 (upstream connector CN1N and downstream connector CN2N)
- Lower relay board 800 on the back of the panel (upstream connector CN1Q and other downstream connectors)

When one of these is considered as a second substrate, the upstream side thereof can be considered as the first substrate, and the downstream side can be considered as the third substrate.
In each of these examples, by using a small connector on the downstream side, it is possible to advantageously arrange components such as a board on the downstream side.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C2).
(Configuration C2)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line, A second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board has more pins than a first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, second board, third board, first transmission line, second transmission line, first connector, and second connector are the same as (specific example 3) in (configuration C1) above. be able to.

Connector CN1B has 28 pins, and connector CN2B has 30 pins (see FIG. 13). Their specifications are also as described above.
In this case, the reason why the number of pins increases on the downstream side is mainly because the number of pins assigned to 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is increased as described above, and the transmission of 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is started. It is the cause.
Increasing the number of pins reduces the current load on one pin, which allows connector CN2B to be smaller than connector CN1B. For example, one with a low rated current can be used.
Therefore, this is advantageous in reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C3).
(Configuration C3)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line, A second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board has a smaller rated current than a first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, second board, third board, first transmission line, second transmission line, first connector, and second connector are the same as (specific example 3) in (configuration C1) above. be able to.

As described above, the rated current of the connector CN1B is 3A, and the rated current of the connector CN2B is 2A.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side is a small one with a low rated current. Therefore, this is advantageous in reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.
Note that in order to use a connector with a small rated current, as described above, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted through a larger number of lines.

Note that the specific example corresponding to (configuration C3) is not limited to the above-mentioned (specific example 3), and various examples can be assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C4-1).
(Configuration C4-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line, A second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board has a narrower terminal pitch than a first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, second board, third board, first transmission line, second transmission line, first connector, and second connector are the same as (specific example 3) in (configuration C1) above. be able to.

As described above, the terminal pitch of connector CN1B is 2 mm, and the terminal pitch of connector CN2B is 1.5 mm.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side is a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, this is advantageous in reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.
In order to use a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted through a larger number of lines as described above.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C4-2) in addition to (configuration C4-1).
(Configuration C4-2)
A second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second substrate has a smaller contact diameter than a first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second substrate.

As described above, the contact diameter of the connector CN1B is 0.7 mm, and the contact diameter of the connector CN2B is 0.65 mm.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side is a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch and a small contact diameter. Therefore, this is advantageous in reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

Note that the specific examples corresponding to (configuration C4-1) and (configuration C4-2) are not limited to the above-mentioned (specific example 3), and various examples can be assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C5).
(Configuration C5)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line, A second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board has a smaller housing size than a first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, second board, third board, first transmission line, second transmission line, first connector, and second connector are the same as (specific example 3) in (configuration C1) above. be able to.

As described above for sizes S1, S2, and S3, the housing size of connector CN2B is smaller than the housing size of connector CN1B.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side is a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, this is advantageous in reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

Note that the specific example corresponding to (configuration C5) is not limited to the above-mentioned (specific example 3), and various examples can be assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

[6.4 Wiring route]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D1-1).
(Configuration D1-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the presentation means, and connected to the second board by a second transmission line. a third board receiving a signal for drive control of the presentation means, the distance between the first board and the third board being shorter than the distance between the first board and the second board. is shorter, and the third substrate has a smaller substrate surface area than the second substrate.

In the case of this (configuration D1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 4) is assumed.
(Specific example 4)
・First board: Relay board 550
・Second board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Third board: LED board 630 on the side unit
・First transmission line: Transmission line H10
・Second transmission line: Transmission line H12

FIG. 54 shows a wiring route between the front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, the upper right side unit LED board 600, and the side unit upper LED board 630. In addition, in the board layout explained in FIG. 8, FIG. 54 shows the wiring routes of the transmission lines H9, H10, and H12 with broken lines, and also shows the connectors CN3C, CN1D, CN2D, CN1E, CN2E, and CN1T used for these connections. It is something.

A harness serving as a transmission line H9 connected to the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 arranged at the lower left of the door 6 is directed upward along the left side of the door 6, and is directed to the right near the upper end. The route reaches the connector CN1D of the relay board 550.
The harness as the transmission line H10 connected to the connector CN2D of the relay board 550 is routed from the upper end of the door 6 along the upper right corner to the connector CN1E of the side unit upper right LED board 600 attached to the side unit 10. Ru.
The harness serving as the transmission line H12 connected to the connector CN2E of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit travels back along the path of the transmission line H10 to reach the connector CN1T of the upper LED board 630 of the side unit.

Here, in FIG. 54, attention is paid to the relay board 550 which is the first board, the side unit upper right LED board 600 which is the second board, and the side unit upper LED board 630 which is the third board.
First, the relay board 550 and the LED board 630 on the side unit are in a positional relationship such that they overlap in the front-back direction (the LED board 630 on the side unit is on the front side (player side)).
The relay board 550 and the side unit upper right LED board 600 are located at separate positions near the top end and right end of the door 6.
Obviously, the distance between the relay board 550 and the LED board 630 on the side unit is shorter than the distance between the relay board 550 and the upper right LED board 600 on the side unit.

Further, as is clear from this figure, the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board, has a smaller board surface area than the side unit upper right LED board 600, which is the second board.

That is, when considering the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit upper LED board 630, the side unit upper LED board 630 is located downstream, but the board area is made smaller on the downstream side.
There is a desire to reduce the substrate area as the substrate is located on the downstream side. The downstream side tends to be closer to motors, sensors, movable parts, etc., and the closer the board is to the front of the gaming machine 1, which is the player's side, because it is equipped with LEDs, etc. This is because having a large area substrate tends to cause disadvantages and inconveniences. For example, depending on the board arrangement, there may be restrictions on the movement of movable objects or restrictions on decoration.
In the above (configuration D1-1), by making the area of the side unit upper LED board 630 smaller than the side unit upper right LED board 600, the configuration is adapted to the circumstances of the downstream board. This improves the degree of freedom in layout and design.

In addition to the above (configuration D1-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D1-2).
(Configuration D1-2)
The third board is attached to a position on the wiring route of the first wiring.

As shown in FIG. 54, the side unit LED board 630, which is the third board, is located on the path of the transmission line H10, which is the first wiring. Therefore, the route of the transmission line H12 is set so as to return to the route of the transmission line H10.
Such wiring route setting is very effective in reducing the size of the LED board 630 on the side unit.

The side unit upper right LED board 600 to which the signal is transmitted from the relay board 550 is the most upstream side of each board in the side unit 10. For example, a side unit upper LED board 630 and a side unit lower right LED board 620 are present downstream.
Further, the side unit upper right LED board 600 includes a side unit upper right movable motor 104 connected to the above-mentioned connector CN4E, a side unit upper right movable solenoid 105 connected to the connector CN5E, a blower 106 connected to the connector CN6E, and a connector. There are sensors in the side unit device 101 connected to CN7E.

In other words, when considering the board that serves as the base point of each part in the side unit, the circuit configuration becomes complicated and the board area inevitably becomes large. The number of lines for wiring increases, and the size and number of connectors CN also tend to increase.
Therefore, the role of the base board in the side unit 10 is assigned to the board at the upper right corner of the frame where a relatively large area can be secured. In other words, it is the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. Assuming a substantially circular gaming surface, it is easy to place a board with a large area at the corner of the frame. Further, the upper right corner is also approximately at the center of the side unit 10.

Then, signals are transmitted to each part within the side unit 10. In this case, there is a member placed at a position on the wiring path of the transmission line H10, which is the first wiring. That is, it is the side unit upper LED board 630 which is the third board.
With such a configuration, first, the total wiring length to each part within the side unit 10 can be shortened. The parts include a side unit upper LED board 630, a lower right side unit LED board 620, a side unit upper right movable motor 104, a side unit upper right movable solenoid 105, a blower 106, a side unit device 101, and the like.

Since each of these parts is wired from the side unit upper right LED board 600 located approximately in the center of the side unit 10, the wiring can be wired with a short line length in the arrangement direction of each part.
Let us consider that the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is close to the relay board 550, is set as the base point. At first glance, this seems more desirable from the positional relationship with the relay board 550. However, if wiring is made to each part using the LED board 630 on the side unit near the relay board 550 as a starting point, the wiring will be formed in parallel from the LED board 630 on the side unit to each part. Then, for example, many wires overlap around the upper right corner of the door 6, and as a result, the total wire length becomes longer. Furthermore, as the number of wires to be wired increases, it becomes difficult to store the wires.
By using the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit as a base point and creating a state where the going/returning routes overlap as in the transmission line H12, the total wiring length can be shortened and the concentration of wiring materials can be reduced. It will be eased.

In addition, it is possible to promote downsizing of the side unit LED board 630. As the most downstream board, the side unit LED board 630 only needs to receive the signals and power supply voltage necessary for its own operation through the connector CN1T, and a small connector can be used. Further, no other connectors are required and the circuit configuration is simple. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32, it is sufficient to mount an LED driver 631 and a light emitting section 632, resulting in a simple configuration.
For these reasons, it is possible to promote miniaturization of the LED board 630 on the side unit, thereby making it suitable as a downstream board, and promoting the above-mentioned effects such as freedom in design.

In other words, in (configuration D1-2), the third board is attached to a position on the wiring route of the first wiring, which means that the second board becomes the base point for wiring to the member including the third board. This means that it is possible to make the wiring more efficient and to make the third board smaller than simply wiring in the order of proximity.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-1).
(Configuration D2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the presentation means, and connected to the second board by a second transmission line. a third board receiving a signal for drive control of the presentation means, the distance between the first board and the third board being shorter than the distance between the first board and the second board. is shorter, and the number of electrical components mounted on the third board is smaller than that of the second board.

In this case as well, the above (specific example 4) is assumed as a corresponding example.
Note that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) is longer than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the upper right LED board 600 (second board) of the side unit. As mentioned above, the distance is shorter.

The electrical components whose numbers are compared may be considered to be all electrical components. For example, they are electrical components such as IC chips, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, and connectors.

Alternatively, the electrical component may be considered to be an electrical component (excluding passive elements) that receives power supply voltage and consumes power. Specifically, the side unit upper right LED board 600 includes LED drivers 605, 606, motor drivers 608, 609, buffer circuits 604, 607, LEDs of the light emitting section 612, etc. (see FIGS. 27 and 28). The side unit upper LED board 630 serves as an LED driver 631, an LED of a light emitting section 632, etc. (see FIG. 32).

Alternatively, the electric component may be considered to be an electric component that directly performs a performance operation (an electrical component that is subject to performance operation control).
Therefore, the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit becomes the LED of the light emitting part 612 (see FIG. 27), and the upper right LED board 630 of the side unit becomes the LED 632 (see FIG. 32).

In any case, the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) has fewer electrical components mounted than the side unit upper right LED board 600 (second board).
Thereby, the side unit upper LED board 630 can reduce the board area. Therefore, the effects described in (configuration D1-1), such as downsizing of the downstream board and thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design, can be obtained.

In addition to the above (configuration D2-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-2).
(Configuration D2-2)
The third substrate is attached to a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. This provides the effect described above (configuration D1-2).

In addition to the above (configuration D2-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-3).
(Configuration D2-3)
The third substrate has a substrate surface area smaller than that of the second substrate. As a result, the effect described above (configuration D1-1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D3-1).
(Configuration D3-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the presentation means, and connected to the second board by a second transmission line. a third board receiving a signal for drive control of the presentation means, the distance between the first board and the third board being shorter than the distance between the first board and the second board. is shorter, and the third board consumes less power in the mounted circuit than the second board.

In this case as well, the above (specific example 4) is assumed as a corresponding example.
Note that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) is longer than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the upper right LED board 600 (second board) of the side unit. As mentioned above, the distance is shorter.

As described above, the side unit upper right LED board 600 has more parts than the side unit upper LED board 630, and consumes a larger current than the side unit upper LED board 630.
Comparing the circuit configurations, it is clear that the side unit upper right LED board 600 consumes more current due to the difference in the number of LEDs in the light emitting part 612 and the light emitting part 632 and the difference in the number of mounted LED drivers. .
In other words, the side unit upper LED board 630 adopts a circuit configuration that reduces power consumption. This allows the side unit upper LED board 630 to have a smaller board area. Therefore, the effects described in (configuration D1-1), such as downsizing of the downstream board and thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design, can be obtained.

In addition to the above (configuration D3-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D3-2).
(Configuration D3-2)
The third substrate is attached to a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. This provides the effect described above (configuration D1-2).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D4-1).
(Configuration D4-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the presentation means, and connected to the second board by a second transmission line. a third board receiving a signal for drive control of the presentation means, the distance between the first board and the third board being shorter than the distance between the first board and the second board. is shorter, and the motor drive control signal is included in the signal for drive control of the presentation means transmitted on the first transmission line, and the signal for drive control of the presentation means transmitted on the second transmission line is shorter. The motor drive control signals are not included in the signals for this purpose.

In this case as well, the above (specific example 4) is assumed as a corresponding example.
Note that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) is longer than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the upper right LED board 600 (second board) of the side unit. As mentioned above, the distance is shorter.

Signals for driving control of the presentation means transmitted through the transmission line H10 and received by the upper right side unit LED board 600, which is the second board, include the enable signal ENABLE_L, clock signal CLK_P, and reset signal RESET_P shown in FIG. 24, for example. It is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 605 (FIG. 27) and the LED driver 606 and motor drivers 608 and 609 (FIG. 28), as detailed in FIGS. 24 to 29. do. That is, signals for LED light emission and motor drive control are included.

The signals for drive control of the presentation means transmitted by the transmission line H12 and received by the side unit LED board 630, which is the third board, are, for example, the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET shown in FIG. It is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 631.

In other words, the signal for controlling the drive of the presentation means transmitted through the transmission line H10 includes the signal for controlling the motor drive, and the signal for controlling the drive of the presentation means transmitted through the transmission line H12 includes the signal for controlling the motor drive. Motor drive control signals are not included.
This is because the second board, the upper right side unit LED board 600 (or a downstream board other than the side unit upper LED board 630), has a motor driver, while the third board, the side unit upper LED board 630, has a motor driver. This means that it does not have a driver.
A relatively large current is used to drive the motor. Furthermore, a large number of lines is required due to motor drive conditions such as three-phase drive and four-phase drive. Therefore, it is difficult to miniaturize a board having a motor driver.
In other words, the side unit upper LED board 630 is not a board on which a motor driver is mounted, thereby promoting miniaturization and making it easier to downsize as the most downstream board. By downsizing, the effect described above (configuration D1-1) can be obtained.

In addition to the above (configuration D4-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D4-2).
(Configuration D4-2)
The third substrate is attached to a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. This provides the effect described above (configuration D1-2).

[6.5 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (Part 2)]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E1).
(Configuration E1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line and connected to the second board through a second transmission line. a third board receiving a first power supply voltage, the third board having a smaller substrate surface area than the second board, and a line used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line. The number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line is smaller than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage.

In the case of this (configuration E1), the following corresponding example (specific example 5) is assumed.
(Specific example 5)
・First board: Relay board 550
・Second board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Third board: LED board 630 on the side unit
・First transmission line: Transmission line H10
・Second transmission line: Transmission line H12
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

Here, the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board, has a smaller board surface area than the side unit upper right LED board 600, which is the second board. FIG. 8 shows a side unit upper LED board 630 and a side unit upper right LED board 600, and the size of the area of these board surfaces is clear from the figure.

Further, as can be seen from the assignment of the connector CN1E in FIG. 24, the transmission line H10 uses two lines for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
On the other hand, as can be seen from the assignments of connector CN2E in FIG. 26 and connector CN1T in FIG. 32, one line is used for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the transmission line H12.

That is, in the side unit upper right LED board 600, the number of wires for transmitting 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the side unit upper LED board 630 is reduced. As a result, the connector CN1T having a small number of terminals can be used on the side unit upper LED board 630 side.

The mounting area of each board is often limited by the arrangement of surrounding components. For example, in this embodiment, the area of the LED board 630 on the side unit is reduced due to the arrangement of surrounding components, etc. In this case, by downsizing the connector CN1T, the parts shown in FIG. In other words, it is easy to secure a placement area for LEDs, LED drivers 631, and the like.
As described above, (configuration E1) is effective when it is desired to reduce the substrate area on the downstream side or when it cannot be avoided.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E2-1).
(Configuration E2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line and connected to the second board through a second transmission line. a third board that receives a supply of the first power supply voltage, the third board has fewer electrical components mounted thereon than the second board, and the third board is equipped with a smaller number of electrical components than the second board, and the third board receives the first power supply voltage on the second transmission line. The number of lines used is smaller than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

In this case as well, the above (specific example 5) is assumed as a corresponding example.
Note that electrical components may be considered as all electrical components, but more preferably, they include all or the main electrical components that consume power based on the power supply voltage of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system, which is the first power supply voltage. do.
Therefore, specifically, the side unit upper right LED board 600 includes LED drivers 605, 606, motor drivers 608, 609, LEDs of the light emitting section 612, etc. (see FIGS. 27 and 28).
Further, the side unit upper LED board 630 serves as an LED driver 631, an LED of a light emitting section 632, etc. (see FIG. 32).

Furthermore, only the LED may be considered as the main electrical component that consumes power based on the power supply voltage of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system. Comparing the number of LEDs in the light emitting section 612 and the light emitting section 632, it is clear that the number of LEDs on the side unit upper right LED board 600 is larger.

In other words, the side unit upper right LED board 600 consumes a large amount of power in the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system, while also supplying it to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630. In this case, the power consumption on the side unit upper LED board 630 side is relatively low.

Because of this configuration, there will be no problem even if the number of lines used for transmitting 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on transmission line H12 is smaller than the number of lines used for transmitting 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on transmission line H10. There will be no. In other words, since the amount of current to be transmitted is also reduced, the configuration is such that no problems occur due to transmission over one line.
Therefore, the number of lines is reduced, the size of the connector on the downstream board is realized, and the configuration is advantageous for mounting on a board with a relatively small board area.

In addition to the above (configuration E2-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E2-2).
(Configuration E2-2)
The third substrate has a substrate surface area smaller than that of the second substrate.

As mentioned above, the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board on the downstream side, has a relatively small area. In this case, being able to miniaturize the connector CN1T is very useful in terms of design.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E3).
(Configuration E3)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line and connected to the second board through a second transmission line. a third board receiving the first power supply voltage, the third board consumes less power in the mounted circuit than the second board, and is used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line. The number of lines is smaller than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

In this case as well, the above (specific example 5) is assumed as a corresponding example.
As described above, the side unit upper right LED board 600 has more parts than the side unit upper LED board 630, and consumes a larger current than the side unit upper LED board 630.
Comparing the circuit configurations, it is clear that the side unit upper right LED board 600 consumes more current due to the difference in the number of LEDs in the light emitting part 612 and the light emitting part 632 and the difference in the number of mounted LED drivers. .

Because of this configuration, there will be no problem even if the number of lines used for transmitting 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on transmission line H12 is smaller than the number of lines used for transmitting 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on transmission line H10. There will be no. In other words, since the amount of current to be transmitted is also reduced, the configuration is such that no problems occur due to transmission over one line.
Therefore, the number of lines is reduced, the size of the connector on the downstream board is realized, and the configuration is advantageous for mounting on a board with a relatively small board area.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E4).
(Configuration E4)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and supplied with a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line and connected to the second board through a second transmission line. a third board receiving a first power supply voltage; a motor drive control signal is included in the signal for drive control of the presentation means transmitted through the first transmission line; The signal for controlling the motor drive is not included in the signal for controlling the drive of the presentation means transmitted on the line, and the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is The number of lines is smaller than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in one transmission line.

In this case as well, the above (specific example 5) is assumed as a corresponding example.
Signals for driving control of the presentation means transmitted through the transmission line H10 and received by the upper right side unit LED board 600, which is the second board, include the enable signal ENABLE_L, clock signal CLK_P, and reset signal RESET_P shown in FIG. 24, for example. It is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 605 (FIG. 27) and the LED driver 606 and motor drivers 608 and 609 (FIG. 28), as detailed in FIGS. 24 to 29. do. That is, signals for LED light emission and motor drive control are included.

The signals for drive control of the presentation means transmitted by the transmission line H12 and received by the side unit LED board 630, which is the third board, are, for example, the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET shown in FIG. It is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 631.

In other words, the signal for controlling the drive of the presentation means transmitted through the transmission line H10 includes the signal for controlling the motor drive, and the signal for controlling the drive of the presentation means transmitted through the transmission line H12 includes the signal for controlling the motor drive. Motor drive control signals are not included.

This is because the second board, the upper right side unit LED board 600 (or a downstream board other than the side unit upper LED board 630), has a motor driver, while the third board, the side unit upper LED board 630, has a motor driver. This means that it does not have a driver.
A relatively large current is used to drive the motor. Furthermore, a large number of lines is required due to motor drive conditions such as three-phase drive and four-phase drive. If the LED board 630 on the side unit is equipped with a motor driver or is a board that relays individual motors, a large number of lines will be required to transmit the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the transmission line H12. become.
In this example, a motor drive control signal is not transmitted to the side unit LED board 630. In other words, the LED board 630 on the side unit does not have a motor drive function. This makes it possible to simplify the circuit and miniaturize the connector in the side unit LED board 630, thereby promoting miniaturization of the side unit LED board 630, which is disposed at the most downstream position and relatively forward.

[6.6 Power supply route]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F1).
(Configuration F1)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to the inner frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 3 (replaceably attached to the inner frame 2). (replaceable member), a production control board 30 attached to the game board 3, and a power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, and a signal for driving control of the production means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6. The power supply voltage outputted from the performance control board 30 and used to drive the performance means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is supplied from the power supply board 300 without going through the game board 3.

In the case of this (configuration F1), the following corresponding concrete example is assumed.
・Production means: LED, motor, blower, etc. installed on the door 6. If an LED or the like is provided in the inner frame 2, it is also included.
- Signals for drive control of the presentation means: clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, which are input to the inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG.
- Power supply voltage for driving the presentation means: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

As mentioned above, in reality, in order to operate the various presentation means on the door 6, not only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) but also 12V DC voltage (DC12V), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB, DC5V), 12V Motor drive voltages (MOT12V, MOT12VA) are used, but these are all voltages based on the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400. Therefore, including these, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) becomes the power supply voltage for driving the presentation means.

As mentioned above, the clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, and enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M from the production control board 30 are transmitted to each board of the door 6 downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400. and the operation of each LED and motor is executed accordingly.
In addition, the 12V DC voltage (DC12V) from the power supply board 300 and the voltage based on it are supplied to each board of the door 6 downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400, and are used as the power supply voltage for the operation of each LED and motor. Ru.
In other words, the effect means of the door 6 is configured to operate using the power supply voltage supplied through the transmission line H3 in response to the drive signal supplied from the effect control board 30 through the transmission lines H6 and H7 shown in FIG. ing.

With such a configuration, it is not necessary to supply the power supply voltage from the power supply board 300 to the door 6 side via the effect control board 30, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the power supply wiring.
In particular, wiring efficiency is improved by sending the drive signal and power supply voltage together to the front frame LED connection board 500 of the door 6 via the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is placed on the inner frame 2 like the power supply board 300. ing. Regarding the power supply wiring to the door 6, it also means that unnecessary wiring to the game board 3 can be eliminated.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F2).
(Configuration F2)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to the inner frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 3 (replaceably attached to the inner frame 2). (replaceable member), a production control board 30 attached to the game board 3, and a power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, and a signal for driving control of the production means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6. The power supply voltage for driving the performance means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is outputted from the performance control board 30 and supplied from the power supply board 300 without going through the game board 3, and the power supply voltage for driving the performance means provided on the game board 3 is supplied from the power supply board 300 without going through the game board 3. Signals for drive control are output from the performance control board 30, and power supply voltage for driving the performance means provided on the game board 3 is supplied from the performance control board 30.

In the case of this (configuration F2), the corresponding specific example is the same as the above F1, but the presentation means include a presentation means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6, and a presentation means provided on the game board 3.
The presentation means provided on the game board 3 are LEDs, motors, etc. driven by each board on the game board 3 shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the power supply voltages for driving the presentation means provided on the game board 3 are the 5V DC voltage (DC5V), 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and 35V DC voltage (DC35V) supplied to the connector CN1J in FIG. .

In this case, the same effect as described above (configuration F1) can be obtained regarding the wiring for the presentation means of the door 6.
In addition, the wiring for the presentation means of the game board 3 can be made more efficient. That is, since the production control board 30 is provided on the game board 3, the production control board 30 sends the power supply voltage and drive control signals together to the LED connection board 700 via the transmission line H20, thereby eliminating unnecessary Power wiring can be eliminated. This allows efficient wiring within the game board 3.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F3).
(Configuration F3)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to the inner frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 3 (replaceably attached to the inner frame 2). a performance control board 30 attached to the game board 3, a power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, a first board attached to the inner frame 2, and a second board attached to the door 6. The first board inputs a signal for driving control of the presentation means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 from the presentation control board 30, and inputs a power supply voltage for driving the presentation means from the power supply board 300. A signal for controlling the drive of the effect means and a power supply voltage for driving the effect means are inputted from the game board 3 without going through the game board 3, and the signal for controlling the drive of the effect means and the power supply voltage for driving the effect means are inputted to the first board through one connector disposed on the first board. It is configured to output to two boards.

In the case of this (configuration F3), a corresponding concrete example is as follows.
・Production means: LED, motor, blower, etc. installed on the door 6. If an LED or the like is provided in the inner frame 2, it is also included.
・First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
- Signals for drive control of the presentation means: clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, which are input to the inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG.
- Power supply voltage for driving the presentation means: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
- Connector: Connector CN2B in Figure 13.

As a result, the same effect as described above (configuration F1) can be obtained regarding the wiring for the presentation means of the door 6, and in addition, the wiring downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400 can be made more efficient. That is, the signal wiring from the production control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) and the power wiring from the power supply board 300 are connected together by the connector CN2B and connected to the downstream front frame LED connection board 500 by the transmission line H8. . This eliminates the need to use multiple connectors for the front frame LED connection board 500. Furthermore, since the transmission line H8 is the wiring for the opening/closing portion between the inner frame 2 and the door 6, it is preferable to combine the wiring with a pair of connectors (CN2B, CN2C) so that the wiring will not be disturbed even when opening/closing.
Note that, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the inner frame LED relay board 400 uses two connectors CN1B and CN4B to connect to the upstream side.
Connector CN1B is used for wiring between game board 3 and connector CN4B is used for wiring within inner frame 2. Therefore, it is preferable to use another connector. In this case, the above-mentioned improvement in wiring efficiency is achieved in the sense that the signals are collectively transmitted to the front frame LED connection board 500 on the downstream side using one connector CN2B.

[6.7 Separation of power supply voltage system]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-1).
(Configuration G1-1)
The gaming machine 1 has a board provided with a first circuit for performing a light emission effect and a second circuit for performing a movable object effect, and the board is provided with a predetermined level input from another board. A first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage as a first power supply voltage to the first circuit; and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage as a second power supply voltage to a performance motor driven by the second circuit. are formed, and the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 6) is assumed.
(Specific example 6)
・Board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・First circuit: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, and a circuit made up of electrical components and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided together with these for light emission (see Figures 27 and 56)
・Second circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and a circuit made up of electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. and conductor patterns provided together with these for movable object production (see Figures 28 and 56)
- Direction motors: side unit lower right movable motor 103, side unit upper right movable motor 104, etc. (see Figures 28 and 55)
- First power line: power line PLa (see Figure 56)
-Second power line: power line PLc (see Figure 56)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 670 (see Figures 29 and 55)

Here, in order to explain the configuration, a power supply system between the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit and the boards upstream and downstream thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.
FIG. 55 shows the power supply between the relay board 550, the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit, the upper LED board 630 of the side unit, and the most downstream motor, etc., in the same format as in FIG. Shows voltage transmission.

Connector CN1D of relay board 550 is connected to connector CN3C of front frame LED connection board 500 in FIG. 48 through transmission line H9.
In this case, from the front frame LED connection board 500, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is supplied through one line, and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied through three lines. Five lines are used for the ground.

As shown in FIG. 55, from the relay board 550, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is supplied to the side unit upper right LED board 600 through a transmission line H10 through one line, and 12V DC voltage is supplied through two lines. (DC12VB) is supplied. Four lines are used for the ground (see connector CN2D in FIG. 23 and connector CN1E in FIG. 24).

The side unit upper right LED board 600 also supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) further downstream.
In the transmission line H12 from the connector CN2E, a single line transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the LED board 630 on the downstream side unit. In this transmission line H12, two lines are used for ground (see FIG. 26).

In addition, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), and motor drive voltage (MOT12V) are transmitted to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit through one line each through the transmission line H11 from connector CN3E. ing. Here, two lines are used for grounding (see Figure 26).
Further, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN7E to the sensor 101S of the side unit device 101 through one line. Here, one line is used as the ground (see FIG. 25).

Here, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) at the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. As described above, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated using the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the power supply isolation/protection circuit 670 (see FIG. 29), and is supplied to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit via the transmission line H11. ing.
In addition, the separated motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted from connector CN4E to the upper right movable part motor 104 of the side unit, from connector CN5E to the upper right movable part solenoid 105 of the side unit, and from connector CN6E to the blower 106 ( For the above, see FIG. 28).

In the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, a power separation/protection circuit 671 (see FIG. 29) separates a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) and uses it as a power supply voltage for motor drivers 608 and 609 inside the board.

The lower right side unit LED board 620 supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), and motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to downstream devices, respectively.
That is, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN4F to the lower right movable object position detection switch 102 of the side unit through one line. Here, one line is used as the ground. Further, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted from the connector CN1F to the lower right movable motor 103 of the side unit via two lines. Further, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the LED board 625 through one line from the connector CN2F (see FIG. 30 for the above).

FIG. 56 shows a power supply system separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input to the connector CN1E is directly formed into a power supply line PLa, and is supplied to the LED drivers 605, 606, the light emitting section 612, and the connectors CN2E, CN3E, and CN7E.

Further, the power supply separation/protection circuit 670 (see FIG. 29) in FIG. 56 separates the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to form a power supply line PLc. As a result, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is used as a reference voltage in the motor drivers 608 and 609, and is connected to the upper right movable motor 104 of the side unit, the solenoid 105, and the blower from the connectors CN4E, CN5E, and CN6E, as shown in FIG. 106.

Further, the power supply separation/protection circuit 671 (see FIG. 29) in FIG. 56 separates the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) to form the power supply line PLb. As a result, 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to the motor drivers 608 and 609 as an operating voltage.

It can be understood from FIG. 56 that the specific example 6 corresponds to the configuration G1.

Further, the following example (specific example 7) corresponding to the above-mentioned (configuration G1-1) is also assumed.
(Specific example 7)
・Substrate: Front frame LED connection board 500
・First circuit: A circuit made up of electric components such as wiring, resistors, and capacitors related to signals for light emission, which was provided for light emission by the LED board downstream of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C. Circuits: motor drivers 510, 511, and circuits and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided for movable object production; motor for production: connector CN10, transmission line H15, button LED connection board Motor/first power line (not shown) connected via connectors CN1G and CN3G (Fig. 33) of 640: power line PLp (see Fig. 57)
-Second power line: power line PLr (see Figure 57)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 520

Transmission of power supply voltage between the front frame LED connection board 500, the inner frame LED relay board 400 upstream thereof, and the downstream relay board 550 and button LED connection board 640 is as shown in FIGS. 48 and 55. .
FIG. 57 shows a power supply system separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the front frame LED connection board 500.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input to the connector CN2C forms the power line PLp as it is, and is supplied to the LED driver 509 and the connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C.

Further, the power supply separation/protection circuit 520 (see FIG. 15) in FIG. 57 separates the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to form a power supply line PLr. As a result, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is used as a reference voltage in the motor drivers 510 and 511, and is supplied from the connector CN10C to the button LED connection board 640 via the transmission line H15 (see FIG. 48). This motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is supplied to the motor of the vibration device from the connector CN4G of the button LED connection board 640 (see FIG. 33).

Further, the power supply separation/protection circuit 521 (see FIG. 19) in FIG. 57 separates the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) to form the power supply line PLq. As a result, 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to the motor drivers 510 and 511 as an operating voltage.

It can be understood from FIG. 57 that specific example 7 corresponds to configuration G1.

That is, such (configuration G1-1) achieves the effect of stabilizing the power supply voltage of the LED system by separating the LED power supply system and the motor power supply system via a protection circuit. That is, it is made so that it is difficult for power supply noise caused by the motor drive to mix in, and it is made difficult for the influence of voltage fluctuations caused by the motor drive to occur.
LEDs are very often driven to emit light, whereas motors are sometimes driven with high current consumption. It is possible to prevent the light emission from becoming unstable due to the influence from the motor power supply voltage system.

Further, in both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of specific example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of specific example 7, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). . That is, the power supply system is not branched into two systems on the upstream board. Therefore, the number of power supply systems connected to the upstream board can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and connector pins can be reduced.

In addition to the above (configuration G1-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-2).
(Configuration G1-2)
One or both of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is output to the outside of the substrate.

In the case of this (configuration G1-2), the above specific examples 6 and 7 can also be cited.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of specific example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of specific example 7 do not support 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) or motor drive voltage (MOT12V). It is output from connector CN to downstream boards and devices.
Therefore, it is possible to use different power sources for the motor and the LED board on the downstream side.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-3) in addition to the above (configuration G1-1) or (configuration G1-2).
(Configuration G1-3)
The protection circuit is a protection circuit using a diode to prevent reverse current from flowing from the second power supply line to the first power supply line.

Specific examples 6 and 7 above include power supply isolation/protection circuits 670 and 520, which correspond to protection circuits, but both use diodes D8E (see Figure 29) and D18C (see Figure 15) to prevent reverse current. ing.
This prevents the light emitting operation from becoming unstable due to reverse current from the motor power supply voltage system (power supply lines PLc, PLr, which are the second power supply lines) with a large amount of current. The system can be easily divided into two power supply voltage systems.

In addition to the above (configuration G1-3), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-4).
(Configuration G1-4)
The diode is a Schottky barrier diode.

The diodes D8E and D18C mentioned above are Schottky barrier diodes. By using a Schottky barrier diode with a small forward voltage drop, it is possible to efficiently extract the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the second power supply voltage, from the input power supply voltage, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and it is relatively large. It is suitable as a power source for a motor that consumes current.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G2-1).
(Configuration G2-1)
The gaming machine 1 has a board provided with a first circuit for performing a light emission effect and a second circuit for performing a movable object effect, and the board is provided with a predetermined level input from another board. A first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage as a first power supply voltage to the first circuit; and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage as a second power supply voltage to the second circuit; The first power line and the second power line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 8) is assumed.
(Specific example 8)
・Board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・First circuit: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, and a circuit including electrical components and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided together with these for light emission performance.・Second circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and Along with these, a circuit made up of electrical parts and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided for the purpose of creating a movable body. ・First power line: Power line PLa (see Figure 56)
-Second power line: power line PLb (see Figure 56)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 671

In addition, in the case of this (configuration G2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 9) is also assumed.
(Specific example 9)
・Substrate: Front frame LED connection board 500
・First circuit: A circuit made up of electric components such as wiring, resistors, and capacitors related to signals for light emission, which was provided for light emission by the LED board downstream of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C. Circuit: Motor drivers 510, 511, and a circuit made up of electrical components and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided together with these for movable object production. ・First power line: Power line PLp (see Figure 57)
-Second power line: power line PLq (see Figure 57)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 521

Such (configuration G2-1) stabilizes the power supply voltage of the LED system by separating the LED power supply system and the motor driver power supply system. That is, it is made so that it is difficult for power supply noise caused by the motor drive to mix in, and it is made difficult for the influence of voltage fluctuations caused by the motor drive to occur.
Although LEDs are driven to emit light very frequently, a motor driver that drives a motor and its peripheral circuits are easily affected by large current consumption by the motor. It is possible to prevent light emission from becoming unstable due to influence from the power supply voltage system of the motor driver.

Further, in both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of specific example 8 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of specific example 9, the 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the supplied 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB). . That is, the power supply system is not branched into two systems on the upstream board. Therefore, the number of power supply systems connected to the upstream board can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and connector pins can be reduced.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G2-2) in addition to the above (configuration G2-1).
(Configuration G2-2)
The board outputs the first power supply voltage to another board.

In the case of this (configuration G2-2), the above specific examples 6 and 7 can also be cited.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of specific example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of specific example 7 transmit 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) from connector CN to the downstream board. It is outputting.
In the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600, the downstream board is the side unit lower right LED board 620 and the side unit upper LED board 630. In the case of the front frame LED connection board 500, it is the relay board 550 (or the side unit upper right LED board 600 via the relay board 550) or the button LED connection board 640.
Therefore, even on the downstream board, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) that is less affected by the power supply voltage system of the motor driver can be used.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G 2 -3) in addition to the above (configuration G 2 -1) or (configuration G 2 -2).
(Configuration G2-3)
The protection circuit is a protection circuit using a diode to prevent reverse current from flowing from the second power supply line to the first power supply line.

Specific examples 8 and 9 above include power supply isolation/protection circuits 671 and 521, which correspond to protection circuits, but both use diodes D7E (see Figure 29) and D19C (see Figure 19) to prevent reverse current. ing.
This prevents the light emitting operation from becoming unstable due to reverse current from the motor driver power supply voltage system (power lines PLb and PLq, which are the second power supply lines). It can be divided into two power supply voltage systems.

Note that Schottky barrier diodes may be used as the diodes D7E and D19C.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-1).
(Configuration G3-1)
The gaming machine 1 has a board provided with a first circuit for performing a movable body effect, and the board has a power supply voltage of a predetermined level inputted from another board as the first power supply voltage. A first power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to one circuit, and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage as a second power supply voltage to a performance motor driven by the first circuit are formed, and the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G3-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 10) is assumed.
(Specific example 10)
・Board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・First circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and a circuit consisting of electrical components and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided together with these for movable object performance. ・Direction motor: Side unit lower right movable object motor 103 , side unit upper right movable motor 104, etc.・First power line: power line PLb (see Figure 56)
-Second power line: power line PLc (see Figure 56)
・Predetermined level power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 670, 671

In addition, in the case of this (configuration G3-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 11) is also assumed.
(Specific example 11)
・Substrate: Front frame LED connection board 500
・First circuit: motor drivers 510, 511, and a circuit made up of electrical components and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided together with these for movable object performance ・Motor for performance: connector CN10, transmission line H15, button Motor/first power line (not shown) connected via connectors CN1G and CN3G (FIG. 33) of the LED connection board 640: power line PLq (see FIG. 57)
-Second power line: power line PLr (see Figure 57)
・Predetermined level power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 520, 521

In such a configuration (configuration G2-1), the motor power supply system and the motor driver power supply system are separated via a protection circuit to stabilize the respective power supply voltages. In other words, the reverse current from the motor system to the motor driver's power supply system due to large current drive and the mixing of power supply noise are avoided.

Furthermore, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of specific example 10 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of specific example 11 convert the supplied 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) into 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) and motor drive voltage ( MOT12V) is separated. In other words, the power supply system is not branched into three systems on the upstream board. Therefore, the number of power supply systems connected to the upstream board can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and connector pins can be reduced.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-2) in addition to the above (configuration G3-1).
(Configuration G3-2)
One or both of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is output to the outside of the substrate.

In the case of this (configuration G3-2), the above specific examples 10 and 11 can also be cited.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of specific example 10 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of specific example 11 transfer the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the connector CN to the downstream board. Outputting to a device. Therefore, the motor drive voltage can be made into an independent power supply voltage system even on the downstream side, and the influence on other power supply systems can be reduced.

Note that a configuration example in which 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to a motor driver on a downstream board is also considered. For example, 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) may be supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit via the relay board 550 and used as the power supply voltage for the motor drivers 608 and 609.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-3) in addition to the above (configuration G3-1) or (configuration G3-2).
(Configuration G3-3)
The protection circuit includes a protection circuit using a first diode for preventing reverse current from the first power supply line, and a protection circuit using a second diode for preventing reverse current from the second power supply line. It is provided.

In the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600 of specific example 10, a power isolation/protection circuit 671 using a first diode D7E (see FIG. 29) from the power line PLb, and a second diode D8E (see FIG. 29) from the power line PLc. A power supply isolation/protection circuit 670 is provided using a power supply isolation/protection circuit (see ).
In the case of the front frame LED connection board 500 of specific example 11, a power isolation/protection circuit 521 using a first diode D19C (see FIG. 19) from the power line PLq, and a second diode D18C (see FIG. 15) from the power line PLr. A power supply isolation/protection circuit 520 is provided using a power supply isolation/protection circuit (see ).

This prevents the power supply of the motor driver, etc. from becoming unstable due to reverse current from the power supply lines PLc and PLr (second power supply line) of the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the power supply of the motor with a large amount of current. I can do it.
Further, it is possible to prevent other power supply systems from becoming unstable due to reverse current from the power supply lines PLb and PLq (first power supply lines) of 12V DC voltage (DC12VS), which is the power supply voltage of the motor driver.
Further, in this case, one power supply voltage system can be easily divided into two power supply voltage systems by the first and second diodes.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-4) in addition to the above (configuration G3-3).
(Configuration G3-4)
The second diode is a Schottky barrier diode.

That is, the diode D8E (see FIG. 29) and the diode D18C (see FIG. 15) use Schottky barrier diodes.
By using a Schottky barrier diode with a small forward voltage drop, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the second power supply voltage, can be efficiently extracted from the input power supply voltage, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and has relatively large current consumption. Suitable as a motor power source.

In addition to the above (configuration G3-3), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-5).
(Configuration G3-5)
The second diode is a Schottky barrier diode, and the first diode has a higher forward voltage than the second diode.

That is, the diode D7E (see FIG. 29) and the diode D19C (see FIG. 19) are normal diodes having a higher forward voltage than a Schottky barrier diode. For example, a normal PN diode is used.
In the case of a Schottky barrier diode, the forward voltage is low and the current efficiency is good, but the layout area on the substrate is relatively large. This is disadvantageous for alignment on the substrate and tends to increase the area of the substrate. Therefore, the motor driver side, which consumes less current than the motor, uses a general diode with a small area. This prevents an increase in the required area, improves the efficiency of board arrangement, and is advantageous for application to small boards.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-1).
(Configuration G4-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first electric component related to a first effect, a second electric component related to a second effect, and a first board, and the first board receives input from an external board. a first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage at a predetermined level to the first electrical component as a first power supply voltage; a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage as a second power supply voltage to the second electrical component; is formed, the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit, and only one of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is connected to the first power supply line. The signal is output from the board to the second board.

In the case of this (configuration G4-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 12) is assumed. In addition, the first effect and the second effect may be any of the following: a light emission effect using LEDs, a movable object effect using a motor/solenoid, etc., an image display effect on a liquid crystal panel, a vibration effect, a blower effect, an audio effect, etc. In the example below, the first effect is a light emission effect, and the second effect is a movable object effect.

(Specific example 12)
・First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Second board: Relay board 550 and side unit upper right LED board 600
・First electrical component: Electrical components (circuit components and devices) related to lighting effects
・Second electrical parts: Electrical parts (circuit parts and devices) related to moving object performance
・First power line: power line PLp
・Second power line: power line PLr or PLq
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V) or 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 520 or 521

In such (configuration G4-1), the power supply system is separated by the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the upstream board, via the power separation/protection circuit 520 or the power separation/protection circuit 521. . For example, the power line PLp and the power line PLr (or PLq) are separated. Then, only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the power line PLp is output to the downstream relay board 550 (and the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit).
That is, while the necessary power supply system is formed within the board, one system of power supply voltage is supplied to the second board on the downstream side. This makes it possible to simplify the wiring between the boards (for example, transmission lines H9 and H10).

This configuration is very advantageous, especially when the substrates are placed apart from each other. The front frame LED connection board 500, relay board 550, and side unit upper right LED board 600 are separated from each other at the lower left and upper right of the gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 8, so the transmission line H9 has to be long. do not have. In such cases, it is useful to be able to reduce the number of power supply systems.

By the way, the button LED connection board 640 can also be considered as the second board in this (configuration G4-1). This is an example in which the second power supply voltage is sent to the second board.
In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 outputs only the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) of the power line PLr to the button LED connection board 640 on the downstream side.
In other words, in this case as well, one system of power supply voltage is supplied to the second substrate on the downstream side, so that the wiring between the substrates (for example, the transmission line H15) can be simplified.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-2) in addition to the above (configuration G4-1).
(Configuration G4-2)
In the second board, the one power supply voltage supplied from the first board is separated into a plurality of power supply lines via a protection circuit.

The second board of this (configuration G4-2) corresponds to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.
The side unit upper right LED board 600 receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) from the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the first board, and connects it to multiple power lines PLa, PLb, PLc via power separation/protection circuits 670 and 671. It is separated into

In other words, even if the transmission lines H9 and H10 are one power supply system, if a motor drive voltage (MOT12V) or 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is required downstream, the power supply should be branched at the downstream board. ing.
This allows only one power supply system to be supplied using the transmission lines H9 and H10, regardless of the configuration on the downstream side.
This is useful when a component (in this example, the side unit 10) that is replaced for each model has a downstream board. There are models of the side unit 10 that are equipped with a motor and models that are not equipped with a motor, but models that do not have a motor naturally do not require a power source for the motor. Considering this, the transmission lines H9 and H10 only need to transmit one system of power, but this is not possible for models with motors. Therefore, in the case of a model with a motor, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are separated on the second board (side unit upper right LED board 600) as necessary.
In other words, the transmission lines H9 and H10 can be simplified by separating the same type of power supply voltage as the power supply voltage separated on the first board (front frame LED connection board 500) on the second board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-3) in addition to the above (configuration G4-1) or (configuration G4-2).
(Configuration G4-3)
The second board is provided with a power line for driving a motor that is separated from the one power supply voltage supplied from the first board via a protection circuit.

The second board of this (configuration G4-3) corresponds to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and separates the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) of the power line PLc via the power separation/protection circuit 670.
When obtaining the motor drive voltage (MOT), by preventing backflow using the power supply separation/protection circuit 670, it is possible to avoid the effects of power supply noise and the like due to motor drive from affecting other power supply systems.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-1).
(Configuration G5-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first electric component related to a first effect, a second electric component related to a second effect, and a first board, and the first board receives input from an external board. a first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage at a predetermined level to the first electrical component as a first power supply voltage; a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage as a second power supply voltage to the second electrical component; is formed, the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit, and both the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage are transferred from the first substrate to the second substrate. Output.

In the case of this (configuration G5-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 13) is assumed. In addition, the first effect and the second effect may be any of the following: a light emission effect using LEDs, a movable object effect using a motor/solenoid, etc., an image display effect on a liquid crystal panel, a vibration effect, a blower effect, an audio effect, etc. In the example below, the first effect is a light emission effect, and the second effect is a movable object effect.

(Specific example 13)
・First board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: Side unit lower right LED board 620
・First electrical component: Electrical components (circuit components and devices) related to lighting effects
・Second electrical parts: Electrical parts (circuit parts and devices) related to moving object performance
・First power line: power line PLa
・Second power line: power line PLc
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power supply separation/protection circuit 670

In such (configuration G5-1), both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) separated by the power supply separation/protection circuit 670 at the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are connected to the lower right side unit downstream. It is supplied to the LED board 620 (see FIG. 55).
A configuration in which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) power line PLa and a motor drive voltage (MOT12V) power line PLc are formed by the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and power is supplied to the first electric component and the second electric component, respectively. The configuration is such that it can also be used in the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit on the downstream side.
This eliminates the need to provide a circuit for power isolation (power isolation/protection circuit 670) on the lower right LED board 620 side of the side unit, and the circuit configuration on the board can be simplified.

Further, a configuration in which both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) are transmitted is an effective configuration between boards located relatively close to each other or between boards included in the same unit.
The side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit lower right LED board 620 are boards arranged close to each other as shown in FIG. 8, and the length of the transmission line H11 is also short. Furthermore, these are all substrates placed within the side unit 10, and are usually handled as a unit of the side unit 10. In other words, even if the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit lower right LED board 620 have a slightly complicated wiring configuration or a large number of lines, this is not a disadvantageous situation. On the contrary, there is a greater advantage in that the power supply separation/protection circuit 670 for power supply isolation only needs to be provided on the upper right LED board 600 side of the side unit. For this reason, the plurality of separated power supply systems are transmitted downstream as they are, so that the plurality of power supply systems can be used as they are on the downstream board.
Furthermore, the power supply separation/protection circuit 670 prevents power supply noise from the motor power supply system from flowing into the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for producing light emission, thereby stabilizing the LED light emission operation. This effect of stabilizing the LED light emitting operation can also be obtained on the lower right LED board 620 side of the side unit.

Note that this (configuration G5-1) differs from the above-mentioned (configuration G4-1) in the above points. In the example in which (configuration G4-1) is applied, the front frame LED connection board 500 and the relay board 550 (and the upper right side unit LED board 600) are used, but this is because the boards are separated by a distance as described above. This makes it more effective.
On the other hand, (configuration G5-1) can be said to be a suitable configuration between substrates that are close to each other or between substrates that are handled together.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-2) in addition to the above (configuration G5-1).
(Configuration G5-2)
The second electrical component is an electrical component that consumes a larger current than the first electrical component.

In the above-mentioned specific example 13, the first electric component is an electric component related to light emitting effects, and the second electric component is an electric component related to movable object effects. In this case, the first electrical components are LEDs, LED drivers, and their peripheral circuit components, and the second electrical components are devices such as motors and solenoids, motor drivers, and their peripheral circuit components. That is, the second electric component consumes a large amount of power.
By separating the power supply system for the second electric component as the power line PLa, the influence on the operation of the first electric component can be reduced.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-3) in addition to the above (configuration G5-1) or (configuration G5-2).
(Configuration G5-3)
The second board also includes the first electrical component and the second electrical component.

The lower right side unit LED board 620, which corresponds to the second board, has an LED light emitting section 622, an LED driver 621, and the like, which correspond to the first electric component (see FIG. 31). It also has a connector CN1F corresponding to the second electrical component. The connector CN1F in this case constitutes a circuit for the side unit lower right movable motor 103.
In this way, the side unit lower right LED board 620 is a board that uses both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and is suitable for transmission of these.

By the way, the configurations described above from (Configuration G1-1) to (Configuration G5-3) also have the aspect of dividing the power supply system according to usage.
For example, the side unit upper right LED board 600 uses the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for both LED light emission drive and motor drive.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 29, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are prevented from affecting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the diode D7E and the Schottky barrier diode D8E.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) are used in motor drivers 608 and 609 in FIG. 28.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the LED driver 605 drives the light emitting section 612 to emit light using a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
In this way, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is the power supply voltage for the LED and LED driver.
The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is a power supply voltage for driving the motor.
The 12V direct current voltage (DC12VS) is the power supply voltage for the motor driver.
By dividing the 12V power supply system according to usage as described above, mutual influence can be avoided. For example, in the past, if the LED power supply voltage was directly used in a motor driver, the motor driver could sometimes break down. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, power supply systems are divided according to usage.

In addition, even if large current is instantaneously consumed due to the motor drive of a movable accessory, the LED light emission is stabilized without affecting the LED light emission, and the number of lines for the power supply voltage in the transmission line H10 is reduced. I'm trying to make it possible.

[6.8 Number of power lines and ground lines]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-1).
(Configuration H1-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the performance device and an output side connector, a second board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the performance device and an input side connector, and an output side board. wiring that electrically connects the side connector and the input side connector, and each of the connectors and the wiring has a power terminal of a first system and a power terminal of a second system different from the first system. , including a ground terminal and a drive signal terminal, where the number of power terminals in the first system is N, the number of power terminals in the second system is M, and the number of ground terminals is L. , satisfies the relationship N+M>L.

In this (configuration H1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 14) is assumed.
(Specific example 14)
・First board: LED connection board 700
・Second board: Lower relay board 800
・Output side connector: Connector CN11J (see Figure 40)
・Input side connector: Connector CN1Q (see Figure 46)
・Wiring: Transmission line H30
・First system power supply terminal: 4th pin, 6th pin (number N = 2)
・Second system power supply terminal: 7th pin, 9th pin (number M = 2)
・Ground terminal: 1st pin, 15th pin, 16th pin (number L = 3)
・Circuit related to drive control of production device: Electrical components, wiring, etc. that constitute the LED drive circuit system from the LED connection board 700 to the decorative board 820

In such (configuration H1-1), the number of ground lines (number of terminals) is smaller than the number of power lines (number of terminals) depending on the current consumption on the downstream side.
FIG. 58 shows the LED connection board 700, the lower relay board 800, and the transmission of the power supply system to the downstream side thereof.
From the connector CN11J of the LED connection board 700 to the connector CN1Q of the bottom relay board 800, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted as the power supply voltage of the first system through two lines, and 2V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted as the power supply voltage of the second system. The motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted through the main line. The number of ground lines is three.

Downstream from the backside lower relay board 800, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the decorative board 820 through six lines using a connector CN3Q and a transmission line H31.
Further, a motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted from the connector CN2Q to the movable motor 830.
Further, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN4Q to the position detection switch 831.

Here, consider the transmission line H30 and the connectors CN11J and CN1Q at both ends thereof.
As a basic design, when there are four power supply lines, there are also four ground lines, but as shown in the figure, there are three ground lines.
This is because a plurality of types of power supply voltages are supplied in the number that satisfies the respective consumption currents, but the number of grounding lines is sufficient to satisfy the total consumption current.
Note that the back-of-board relay board 800, LED connection board 700, etc. are boards with a laminated structure of multiple layers, and also have a layer in which a ground is commonly formed as a so-called solid ground, in which a conductor is painted solidly over a wide area. . The plurality of pins assigned to the ground in the connector CN11J and the connector CN1Q are connected to a common ground in the board. For this reason, one pin and line assigned to ground are not used as a dedicated ground for each power supply. Unless otherwise specified, it can be assumed that the ground pin of the connector and the common ground are connected to other substrates as well.

Let's assume that one line can handle 1A (ampere).
Now consider the maximum current consumption on the downstream side. In this case, it is the sum of the maximum amount of current used by the decorative board 820, the maximum amount of current used by the movable object motor 830, and the maximum amount of current used by the position detection switch 831.
For example, the sum of the current consumption of the decorative board 820 and the position detection switch 831 in the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system is 1.3A, and the current consumption of the movable motor 830 in the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) system is 1.6A. In this case, each power supply system requires two lines. For this reason, there are 4 pieces with 2 pieces each.
However, in this case, the ground only requires a total of 2.9 A, so the number of ground lines only needs to be three.

In other words, in the LED connection board 700, transmission line H30, and bottom relay board 800, two types of power supply voltages are set to four by setting the number of lines according to the current consumption of each, while regarding the ground, The number of lines is set to three based on the total maximum current consumption.
This reduces the number of lines required for power supply.
Furthermore, by reducing the number of wires between boards and the number of terminals of the connector CN, cost and space savings are realized.

In the above (configuration H1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 15) is also assumed.
(Specific example 15)
・First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Output side connector: Connector CN2B (see Figure 13)
・Input side connector: Connector CN2C (see Figure 15)
・Wiring: Transmission line H8
・First system power supply terminal: 27th pin, 28th pin, 29th pin, 30th pin (number N = 4)
・Second system power supply terminal: 1st pin, 3rd pin (number M = 2)
・Ground terminal: 5th pin, 7th pin, 8th pin, 17th pin, 18th pin (number L = 5)
-Circuit related to drive control of the production device: electrical components, wiring, etc. that constitute the LED drive circuit system from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the front frame LED connection board 500

In this case as well, by knowing the current consumption on the downstream side, the number of power supply lines (number of terminals) that combines the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the first system and the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) of the second system can be reduced to 6. However, the configuration is such that the number of ground lines (number of terminals) is reduced to five.

In other words, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, the transmission line H8, and the front frame LED connection board 500, two types of power supply voltages are set to six by setting the number of lines according to their respective current consumption. The number of lines is set to five by setting the number of lines based on the total maximum current consumption.
This reduces the number of lines required for power supply.
Furthermore, by reducing the number of wires between boards and the number of terminals of the connector CN, cost and space savings are realized.
Furthermore, in this case, the transmission line H8 constitutes the wiring between the inner frame 2 and the door 6 as shown in FIG. 5, and is a wiring that moves and is exposed as the door 6 is opened and closed. Therefore, the effect of reducing the number of lines is significant.
In addition, since it is the opening/closing part of the door 6, restrictions on arrangement and height of parts are likely to occur depending on the operation. For this reason, both the connectors CN2B and CN2C are components that are desirable to be miniaturized, but it is extremely effective in terms of design to be able to reduce the number of terminals of the connectors CN2B and CN2C.

By the way, considering the following (specific example 16), three power supply systems are provided.
(Specific example 16)
・First board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: Side unit lower right LED board 620
・Output side connector: Connector CN3E (see Figure 26)
・Input side connector: Connector CN3F (see Figure 30)
・Wiring: Transmission line H11
・Power terminal of 1st system (DC12VB): 11th pin (number of pins = 1)
・Second system (MOT12V) power supply terminal: 15th pin (number of pins = 1)
・Power terminal of 3rd system (DC5V): 1st pin (number of pins = 1)
・Ground terminal: 8th pin, 13th pin (number = 2)

The same concept as described above is adopted for the side unit lower right LED board 620 in FIG. )) The number of lines used is three, and the number of lines for ground is two. This also has the effect of reducing the number of lines.

Therefore, the technology realized in Specific Examples 14 and 15 has wiring that electrically connects the first board, the second board, the output side connector, and the input side connector in (configuration H1-1), and then In other words, each of the connectors and the wiring satisfies the relationship X>L, where X is the number of all power supply terminals in the plurality of systems, and L is the number of ground terminals.

In addition to the above (configuration H1-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-2).
(Configuration H1-2)
The number of ground terminals is the minimum number of integers larger than the sum of the maximum current consumption of the first system power supply and the maximum current consumption of the second system power supply divided by the rated current value of the connector terminal. It is considered to be the number of values.

In other words, according to Example 14, the sum of the maximum current consumption of each system = 2.9A, and the rated current value of the connector terminal is 1A, so 2.9÷1=2.9, and the number of ground terminals. is assumed to be "3" which is the minimum number of integers larger than that.
This is the most efficient configuration for wiring.
The case of Specific Example 15 can be considered in the same way.

In addition, even when the power supplies of the first, second, and third systems are provided as in Example 16, the number of ground terminals is determined by dividing the sum of the maximum current consumption of the power supplies of each system by the rated current value of the connector terminal. The wiring efficiency is maximized by setting the number to the minimum value among the integers larger than the number.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-3) in addition to the above (configuration H1-1) or (configuration H1-2).
(Configuration H1-3)
The power source of the first system and the power source of the second system are separated on the first substrate via a protection circuit.

In the case of specific example 14, as shown in FIG. 36, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) by a power supply isolation/protection circuit 790. As a result, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as a power supply voltage protected from overvoltage and reverse current. Therefore, the LED light emitting circuit system in the LED connection board 700, the lower board relay board 800, and the decorative board 820 is isolated from power supply noise caused by the motor drive voltage system, and stable light emitting operation is performed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-4) in the above (configuration H1-3).
(Configuration H1-4)
The protection circuit is configured using a Schottky barrier diode.

The power supply isolation/protection circuit 790 described above uses a Schottky barrier diode D5J. Since the Schottky barrier diode has a small forward voltage drop, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) can be extracted efficiently from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), making it suitable as a power source for a motor with relatively large current consumption.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H2-1).
(Configuration H2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the performance device and an output side connector, a second board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the performance device and an input side connector, and an output side board. wiring that electrically connects the side connector and the input side connector, and each of the connectors and the wiring has a power terminal of a first system and a power terminal of a second system different from the first system. , including a ground terminal and a drive signal terminal, where the number of power terminals in the first system is N, the number of power terminals in the second system is M, and the number of ground terminals is L. , N+M>L, and the first system power supply and the second system power supply have different voltages.

Regarding such (configuration H2-1), the above-mentioned (specific example 15) applies.
In other words, the inner frame LED relay board 400, the transmission line H8, and the front frame LED connection board 500 have two different voltages: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the first system and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) of the second system. The power supply voltage is set to 6 lines by setting the number of lines according to the respective current consumption, while the ground line is set to 5 lines by setting the number of lines based on the total maximum current consumption.
This reduces the number of lines required for power supply, reduces the number of wiring between boards, and reduces the number of terminals of connector CN, thereby realizing cost reduction and space saving. As mentioned above, the transmission line H8 constitutes the wiring between the inner frame 2 and the door 6, and since it moves as the door 6 opens and closes and is exposed, these effects are extremely effective in terms of design. , which also leads to operational stability.
In particular, an increase in the number of lines is unavoidable to some extent because two types of power supply systems with different voltages are transmitted, but it is significant that the number of ground lines can be reduced to reduce the overall number of lines and terminals.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H2-2) in addition to the above (configuration H2-1).
(Configuration H2-2)
The number of ground terminals is the minimum number of integers larger than the sum of the maximum current consumption of the first system power supply and the maximum current consumption of the second system power supply divided by the rated current value of the connector terminal. It is considered to be the number of values.

In other words, according to specific example 15, if the sum of the maximum current consumption of the first system and the second system is 4.8A, and the rated current value of the connector terminal is 1A, then 4.8÷1=4.8 , and the number of ground terminals is set to "5", which is the minimum number of integers larger than that number. This is the most efficient configuration for wiring.

[6.9 Buffers and signal branching]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J1). FIG. 59 shows the configuration of this "substrate" (configuration J1).
(Configuration J1)
The gaming machine 1 has a first electric component EP related to a first performance, and also includes a first board that relays a performance control signal to another board, and the first board is configured to control the input performance control signal. A first buffer circuit BF1 that performs buffer processing and supplies it to the first electrical component EP, and a production control signal that is output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and is supplied to the first electrical component EP are branched and input, and the buffer processing is performed. It has a second buffer circuit BF2 which is used as an effect control signal to be sent to and supplied to other boards.

In this (configuration J1), the following corresponding example (specific example 17) is assumed.
(Specific example 17)
・Production control signals: clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A)
・First board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Other boards: LED board 630 on the side unit
- First electrical component EP: LED driver 605, light emitting section 612, etc. (see Figure 27)
・First buffer circuit BF1: Buffer circuit 601 (see FIG. 25)
・Second buffer circuit BF2: Buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26)

The signal paths of the production control signals, that is, the clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), the data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), and the reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A) in the side unit upper right LED board 600 shown in FIGS. 24 to 29 are simplified and shown below. 60.

The clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P input to the connector CN1E are first buffered by a buffer circuit 601 at the input stage. The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A, which are the outputs of the buffer circuit 601, are branched and supplied to the buffer circuit 604, the LED driver 605, and the LED driver 606.

The LED driver 605 drives the light emitting section 612 to emit light based on the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A to realize a light emitting effect.

The buffer circuit 604 branches the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A into two systems and inputs them to different terminals. That is, there are a system of terminals A1, A2, and A3, and a system of terminals A5, A6, and A7 (see FIG. 26).
The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A input to the A1, A2, and A3 terminals are buffered and supplied to the connector CN2E from the Y1, Y2, and Y3 terminals, and the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal are The signal RESET is supplied to the side unit LED board 630 via the transmission line H12.

The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A input to the A5, A6, and A7 terminals of the buffer circuit 604 are buffered and supplied from the Y5, Y6, and Y7 terminals to the connector CN3E, and the clock signal CLK and data The signal DATA and the reset signal RESET are supplied to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit via the transmission line H11.

The LED driver 606 converts a clock signal CLK_A, a data signal DATA_A, and a reset signal RESET_A, which are serial data, into parallel data and supplies it to motor drivers 608 and 609 via a buffer circuit 607. The motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/1, and MOT1-/2 generated by the motor drivers 608 and 609 are output from the connector CN3E and connected to the lower right LED board 620 of the downstream side unit. Realizes motor drive.

As can be clearly seen from FIG. 60, the above (configuration J1) includes the configuration of FIG. 59 as specific example 17.
In other words, the side unit upper right LED board 600 relays the effect control signal to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630, and also drives the LED light emission (it is equipped with an LED driver 605). In this case, the effect control signal from upstream is buffered in the buffer circuit 601, then branched to the LED driver 605 and downstream side unit upper LED board 630, further buffered in the buffer circuit 604, and then Supply downstream.

Therefore, the signal attenuation up to the input is compensated by the buffer circuit 601, and stable operation of the LED driver 605 is realized. By compensating the signal in the buffer circuit 604 at the output stage before relaying it further downstream, a stable signal can also be transmitted to the downstream side.
In particular, in the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600, the effect control signal is supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 with a long line length and via the relay board 550. Since the attenuation due to the long line length on the path and passing through the four connectors CN3C, CN1D, CN2D, and CN1E is relatively large, signal compensation by the buffer circuit 601 is an appropriate process.
Furthermore, signal compensation of the buffer circuit 604 is appropriate processing in order to perform stable signal transmission from the output stage connector CN2E to the LED board 630 on the side unit downstream after branching internally.

Note that FIG. 59 shows damping resistors Rd1 and Rd2. That is, the production control signal is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via the damping resistor Rd1.
Further, the effect control signal outputted from the second buffer circuit BF2 is outputted via the damping resistor Rd2.

In the case of the above specific example 17, the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E shown in FIG. 24 correspond to the damping resistor Rd1.
Further, damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E shown in FIG. 26 correspond to damping resistor Rd2.

The clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P are buffered in the buffer circuit 601 after reducing noise and suppressing overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data using damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E. It is processed. This is advantageous in that signal compensation is performed while maintaining waveform quality and signal deterioration is suppressed.
In addition, after the clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A are buffered in the buffer circuit 604, damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E reduce noise and suppress overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data. is performed and then output. This is advantageous in terms of maintaining the waveform quality of the effect control signal transferred downstream and suppressing signal deterioration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-1). FIG. 61 shows the configuration of this "first substrate" (configuration J2-1).
(Configuration J2-1)
The first board includes a first electric component EP related to the first performance and relays a performance control signal to a plurality of other boards, and the first board is configured to control the performance input from the input side connector CNin. It has a first buffer circuit BF1 that performs buffer processing on the signal and supplies it to the first electric component EP, and the production control signal output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electric component EP is branched, a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21, BF22 that are relayed to a plurality of other boards, and perform buffer processing on the plurality of systems of production control signals; and a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21. , and a plurality of output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 that output a plurality of effect control signals output from the BF22 to the other boards that are different from each other.

In this (configuration J2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 18) is assumed.
(Specific example 18)
・Input side connector CNin: Connector CN1E
・Multiple output side connectors CNout1, CNout2: Connectors CN2E, CN3E
・Production control signals: clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A)
・First board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Multiple other boards: side unit lower right LED board 620, side unit upper LED board 630
- First electrical component EP: LED driver 605, light emitting section 612, etc. (see Figure 27)
・First buffer circuit BF1: Buffer circuit 601 (see FIG. 25)
・Second buffer circuit BF21, BF22: Buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26)

As clearly seen from FIG. 60, this specific example 18 has the configuration shown in FIG. 61 as the above-mentioned (configuration J2-1).

In other words, the side unit upper right LED board 600 relays the production control signal to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630 and the side unit lower right LED board 620, and also drives the LED light emission (it is equipped with an LED driver 605). ing).
In this case, the effect control signal from the upstream side from the connector CN1E is buffered in the buffer circuit 601, and then branched to the LED driver 605 and downstream, and the functions of the first and second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are further processed. After being buffered in a buffer circuit 604 equipped with a buffer circuit 604, the data is supplied downstream from connectors CN2E and CN3E.

Therefore, the buffer circuit 601 compensates for signal attenuation up to the input, realizing stable operation of the LED driver 605. By compensating the signal in the buffer circuit 604 at the output stage before relaying it further downstream, a stable signal can also be transmitted to the downstream side. Especially in the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600, considering that the production control signal is supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 with a long line length and via the relay board 550, it is necessary to use the long line length and the four connectors CN3C. , CN1D, CN2D, and CN1E are attenuated relatively large, so signal compensation by the buffer circuit 601 is an appropriate process.

Furthermore, after branching internally, the production control signal is branched to multiple downstream boards to ensure stable signal transmission from the output stage connectors CN2E and CN3E to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630 and side unit lower right LED board 620. For this purpose, signal compensation of the buffer circuit 604 is an appropriate process.

In addition, in the buffer circuit 601, by performing buffer processing at the stage of the common performance control signal before branching, it is efficient in compensating for attenuation in the transmission path up to that point, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the circuit configuration. There is also this aspect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-2) in addition to the above (configuration J2-1).
(Configuration J2-2)
The production control signal input from the input side connector CNin is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via the damping resistor Rd1.

In the case of the above specific example 18, the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E shown in FIG. 24 correspond to the damping resistor Rd1.
The clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P are buffered in the buffer circuit 601 after reducing noise and suppressing overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data using damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E. It is processed. This is advantageous in that signal compensation is performed while maintaining waveform quality and signal deterioration is suppressed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-3) in addition to the above (configuration J2-1) (configuration J2-2).
(Configuration J2-3)
The effect control signals output from the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are supplied to the output connectors CNout1 and CNout2 via damping resistors Rd2 and Rd3.

In the case of the above specific example 18, the damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E shown in FIG. 26 correspond to the damping resistor Rd2, and the damping resistors R24E, R25E, and R26E correspond to the damping resistor Rd3.
After the clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A are buffered in the buffer circuit 604, damping resistors R18E, R19E, R20E, R24E, R25E, and R26E reduce noise and prevent overshoot in the waveform as serial data. , undershoot is suppressed and output from connectors CN2E and CN3E. This is advantageous in terms of maintaining the waveform quality of the effect control signal transferred downstream and suppressing signal deterioration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-1). FIG. 62 shows the configuration of this "first substrate" (configuration J3-1).
(Configuration J3-1)
The first board includes a first electric component EP related to the first performance and relays a performance control signal to a plurality of other boards, and the first board is configured to control the performance input from the input side connector CNin. It has a first buffer circuit BF1 that performs buffer processing on the signal and supplies it to the first electric component EP, and the production control signal output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electric component EP is branched, a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21, BF22 that are relayed to a plurality of other boards, and perform buffer processing on the plurality of systems of production control signals; and a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21. , and a plurality of output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 that output a plurality of effect control signals outputted from the BF22 to the other boards different from each other, and the plurality of second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are connected to the plurality of systems. It is formed of a one-chip circuit that inputs production control signals through separate terminals, buffers them, and outputs them from separate terminals.

In this (configuration J3-1), the above-mentioned (specific example 18) is assumed, and the buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26) is a one-chip circuit having the functions of the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22.
As a result, the same effects as the above (configuration J2-1) can be obtained, and by using a one-chip configuration, it is possible to reduce the substrate area and facilitate layout design.
Further, as shown in FIG. 60, the buffer circuit 604 branches the clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A into two systems, one for A1, A2, and A3 terminals and one for A5, A6, and A7 terminals. The lineage is branching. In other words, the input terminal of the chip is effectively used to branch into two systems, and the effect control signals of each system are buffered. This not only simplifies the configuration for branching, but also allows appropriate signal compensation in each system.

Note that the buffer circuit 761 in FIG. 44 buffers the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C, and then transmits them to the two downstream LED boards from the connectors CN2M and CN3M. This is also an example of branching into two systems using the input terminal of the buffer circuit 604.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-2) in addition to the above (configuration J3-1).
(Configuration J3-2)
The production control signal input from the input side connector CNin is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via the damping resistor Rd1.
This provides the same effect as the above-mentioned (configuration J2-2).

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-3) in addition to the above (configuration J3-1) (configuration J3-2).
(Configuration J3-3)
The effect control signals output from the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are supplied to the output connectors CNout1 and CNout2 via damping resistors Rd2 and Rd3.
This provides the same effect as the above-mentioned (configuration J2-3).

[6.10 Power supply using electrical components]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-1).
(Configuration K1-1)
The gaming machine 1 has a board on which a first electrical component and a second electrical component related to a first performance are provided, and the first electrical component operates using a first voltage as a power supply voltage, and also operates from a first voltage as a power supply voltage. The device includes a terminal that outputs a low second voltage, and the second electric component is configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage.

In this (configuration K1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 19) is assumed. Each component of Specific Example 14 will be explained with reference to FIG. 63.
(Specific example 19)
・Substrate: LED board 780A
・First electrical component: LED driver 782
・Second electrical component: buffer circuit 781
・First voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second voltage: 5V reference voltage Vref
・Terminal that outputs the second voltage: terminal VREF

FIG. 63 shows the configuration of the LED board 780A. This LED board 780A is a modification of the LED board 780 shown in FIG. 45.
In this case, the connector CN1N' has a 4-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 4th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "4", and the terminal assignment is as follows: ), the second pin is a clock signal CLK terminal, the third pin is a data signal DATA terminal, and the fourth pin is a ground terminal.
It goes without saying that the terminal configuration of the upstream board will also be changed accordingly.

As can be seen by comparing with FIG. 45, the case of FIG. 63 is an example in which 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. However, a buffer circuit 781 whose power supply voltage is 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is installed in the same manner as in FIG. 45.

The LED driver 782 uses 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as a power supply voltage, but the terminal VREF is configured to output a 5V reference voltage Vref. The reference voltage Vref is used to set the LED driver 782, and in this case is applied to the terminal CTLSCT, the terminal RESET, the terminal A0, and the terminal A1.

The terminal CTLSCT is a serial bus communication setting terminal, and depending on the terminal voltage (L/H), it is selected whether to set a 3-wire serial bus signal as an input signal or a 2-wire serial bus signal as an input signal.
The terminal RESET is a reset signal input terminal, and is reset at L level.
Terminals A0, A1, A2, A3, and A4 are slave address setting terminals, and a 5-bit slave address of the LED driver 782 itself is set therein. In the case of this LED driver 782, for example, a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminals A0 and A1, and terminals A2, A3, and A4 are connected to ground, so that a slave address of "11000" is set.

In the case of FIG. 63, this reference voltage Vref is used as the power supply voltage of the buffer circuit 781.
Therefore, the efficiency of the power supply configuration is improved, and the input of multiple power supply voltage systems becomes unnecessary. Since input of 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is not required, the connector CN1N' on the input side can also be simplified.

In addition to the above (configuration K1-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-2).
(Configuration K1-2)
The first electrical component is an LED driver, and a first voltage is used to drive the LED.

In Specific Example 19, the first electric component is the LED driver 782, but the LED driver 782 drives the LED of the light emitting section 783 to emit light. A 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB), which is a first voltage, is used to drive the LED of this light emitting section 783 to emit light.
As a result, the LED board 780A in FIG. 63 can operate the LED driver 782, drive the light emitting section 783 to emit light, and operate the buffer circuit 781 with only the input of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which improves the efficiency of the power supply configuration. It becomes suitable.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-3) in addition to the above (configuration K1-1) and (configuration K1-2).
(Configuration K1-3)
The first voltage is supplied to the substrate from another substrate, and the second voltage is not supplied to the substrate.

As described in the description of connector CN1N' in FIG. 63, only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the upstream board, and 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. This provides a configuration that can simplify power supply wiring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-4) in addition to the above (configuration K1-1), (configuration K1-2), and (configuration K1-3).
(Configuration K1-4)
The first electrical component is a driver circuit of a production device, and is one of a plurality of driver circuits to which different slave addresses are set, and the first electrical component is configured to apply the second voltage to its own slave address setting. I am using it.

The LED driver 782, which is a first electric component, is configured to apply a reference voltage Vref, which is a second voltage, to terminals A1 and A2 for setting a slave address. In other words, the voltage used to set the address of the LED driver 782 is used as the power supply voltage in the buffer circuit 781. This becomes a configuration that promotes efficiency of the power source configuration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K2).
(Configuration K2)
The gaming machine 1 has a board on which a first electrical component and a second electrical component related to a first performance are provided, and the first electrical component operates using a first voltage as a power supply voltage, and also operates from a first voltage as a power supply voltage. The second electrical component is provided with a terminal that outputs a low second voltage, and the second electrical component is configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage. The second electrical component is a buffer circuit that performs buffer processing on the production control signal output to other boards.

Specific example 19 described above corresponds to this (configuration K2).
The LED board 780A in FIG. 63 has the role of a relay board for the downstream LED board 790, and also the role of a board that drives LED light emission. In such a case, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used to drive the LED driver 782 and the light emitting unit 783, and the reference voltage Vref as the second voltage is sent to the buffer circuit for signal compensation of the production control signal downstream. Used in 781. This makes it possible to simplify the power supply configuration with a board that functions as both a relay board for effect control signals and a drive board for effects.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K3).
(Configuration K3)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first electrical component into which a production control signal supplied from another board is input, and a second electrical component into which the production control signal is branched and input in parallel with the first electrical component. The first electrical component operates using a first voltage as a power supply voltage, and includes a terminal that outputs a second voltage lower than the first voltage, and the second electrical component operates using a first voltage as a power supply voltage. It is configured to operate using two voltages as the power supply voltage.

Specific example 19 mentioned above corresponds to this (configuration K3).
The LED board 780A in FIG. 63 is a board that branches a clock signal and a data signal DATA, which are input production control signals, and supplies them to the LED driver 782, as well as transmitting them downstream via a buffer circuit 781. In this case, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used to drive the LED driver 782, and a reference voltage Vref as a second voltage is used in the buffer circuit 781 for signal compensation of the production control signal downstream. This makes it possible to simplify the power supply configuration on the board that branches the effect control signals and processes them in parallel.

[6.11 Connectors and signal wiring]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L1-1).
(Configuration L1-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board, a first connector disposed on the first board for transmitting signals between the first board and the second board, and the first board. a second connector disposed on the second board for performing signal transmission between the board and the second board; and a transmission line connecting the first connector and the second connector; Digital signals for effect control and analog signals used for effect are transmitted between the first connector and the second connector, and pins of the first connector and the second connector are assigned for ground. When a given pin is a boundary, all digital signals are assigned to pins that exist in one direction from the boundary, and all analog signals are assigned to pins that exist in the other direction from the boundary. It is being

In this (configuration L1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 20) is assumed.
(Specific example 20)
・First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・First connector: Connector CN2B
・Second connector: Connector CN2C
・Predetermined pins: 17th pin, 18th pin

FIG. 64 shows the assignment to connector terminals (pins) of the connector CN2B of the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the connector CN2C of the front frame LED connection board 500, which are connected by the transmission line H8.
The assignment to the 30-pin terminal has been explained for the connector CN2B in FIG. 13 and for the connector CN2C in FIG. 15, and FIG. 64 shows the state of the assignment as a physical arrangement.

As shown in FIG. 50, the connectors CN2B and CN2C have a configuration in which 30 pins are arranged in two rows of 15 pins each.
The pin numbers from the 1st pin to the 30th pin explained in FIGS. 13 and 15 are alternately assigned to each column, as shown in FIG. 64.
In FIG. 64, signals assigned to one square are shown as pins.

The 5th pin, 7th pin, 8th pin, 17th pin, and 18th pin are considered as ground terminals, and the 17th pin and 18th pin are the pins lined up approximately in the center of the terminal arrangement in connectors CN2B and CN2C. be. In other words, they are pins that are adjacent to each other in a direction perpendicular to the column direction.

When looking at the 17th and 18th pins as boundaries, the assignment of the + terminal and - terminal for the upper right speaker, middle right speaker, upper left speaker, and middle left speaker, respectively, for the pins on the right side of the drawing in Figure 64 is as follows: It is being done. In other words, the speaker signals (analog audio signals supplied to the speakers) passing through the connectors CN2B and CN2C are all collected at the terminal on the right side in the figure of the 17th and 18th pins, which are the boundaries.

In addition, in the pins on the left side of the drawing in Figure 64, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L (general-purpose signal HANYOU), ENABLE_M, clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, serial Data signal S_IN_DATA is being allocated. In other words, the digital signals passing through the connectors CN2B and CN2C are all collected at the terminal on the left side in the figure of the 17th and 18th pins, which are the boundaries.

Furthermore, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) are also transmitted through connector CN2B, transmission line H8, and connector CN2C.
The 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is assigned to the first and third pins located at the left corner in FIG.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is assigned to four pins from the 27th pin to the 30th pin, which is the right corner in FIG.

The connectors CN2B and CN2C have pin assignments in such a multi-row pin configuration.
That is, in the path of the connector CN2B, the transmission line H8, and the connector CN2C, the digital signal and the analog signal are separated into one and the other using the 17th pin and the 18th pin as boundaries. This reduces noise mixed into analog signals (for example, audio signals supplied to speakers) due to the influence of pulses as digital signals, and achieves good performance.

Although FIG. 64 shows an example of a connector in which pins are arranged in two rows, the present invention can be similarly applied to a connector in which pins are arranged in three or more rows.
Furthermore, such a technique can be applied even in the case of a configuration in which pins (including contacts) are arranged in one row as shown in FIGS. 51 and 53, for example. In other words, when a predetermined pin assigned for ground is used as a boundary, all digital signals are assigned to pins that exist in one direction from the boundary pin, and all analog signals are assigned to pins that exist in one direction from the boundary pin. What is necessary is to assign it to a pin that exists in the other direction when viewed from the pin.

In addition to the above (configuration L1-1), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L1-2).
(Configuration L1-2)
In the first connector and the second connector, pins are arranged in a plurality of rows, and the predetermined pins are a plurality of pins adjacent to each other in a direction perpendicular to the row direction.

In other words, this is the configuration shown in FIG. 64 as specific example 20. In a multi-row pin configuration such as a two-row pin configuration, the pins assigned to ground are lined up in a direction perpendicular to the column direction to properly separate digital and analog signals into one and the other. Ru.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L1-3) in addition to the above (configuration L1-1) or (configuration L1-2).
(Configuration L1-3)
The predetermined pin is connected to a solid ground formed on one or both of the first substrate and the second substrate.

For example, as in Specific Example 20 above, if the first board is the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the second board is the front frame LED connection board 500, then both of these inner frame LED relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500 or On the other hand, a solid ground (GND plane) is formed.
The solid ground is formed on both the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500, and the 17th pin, the 18th pin, the 5th pin, the 7th pin, and the 8th pin are connected to the inner frame LED. It is connected to the respective solid grounds of the relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500.

In this way, by connecting the ground that is the boundary between the digital signal and analog signal to the solid ground using connectors CN2B, CN2C, and transmission line H8, the effect of shielding noise that mixes into the analog signal due to the high-frequency pulse of the digital signal is enhanced. be able to.
Note that the solid ground does not necessarily have to be formed on both the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500, and may be formed on at least one of them.

The pattern configuration of the board including the solid ground will be explained using the front frame LED connection board 500 as an example.
The front frame LED connection board 500 is a board with a layered structure having four layers.
FIG. 65 shows electrical components arranged on the surface layer (surface layer) and identification information printed near the electrical components.

In FIG. 65, the identification information actually printed on the board includes "CN1" and "CN2" for the connector CN, "R1" and "R2" for the resistor, and "C1" and "C2" for the capacitor. etc., but the identification information with "C" added to the end corresponds to the reference numeral of each part shown in FIGS. 15 to 20.
However, regarding ICs, the printed identification information is "IC1" etc., but in FIGS. 15 to 20, these are given numerical codes such as LED driver 509 and buffer circuit 504, and the identification information shown in FIG. It does not correspond to information.

Further, FIG. 66 shows electrical components arranged on the back layer, which is the back side with respect to the front layer, and identification information printed near the electrical components. Note that this is shown as a perspective view seen from the surface layer side, and each electrical component and identification information are shown in a horizontally reversed state.
As will be described later, the shaded areas in FIGS. 65 and 66 indicate prohibited areas where pattern formation is prohibited. There are actually no diagonal lines on the board.

67, FIG. 68, FIG. 69, and FIG. 70 respectively show patterns of conductors in each layer from the surface layer.
FIG. 67 shows a pattern for forming wiring in the surface layer, FIG. 68 shows a pattern for forming wiring in the first inner layer, which is the layer below the surface layer, and FIG. 69 shows a pattern, forming wiring in the second inner layer, which is the layer below the first inner layer. Reference numeral 70 indicates a pattern for forming wiring on the back layer.

From FIG. 65 to FIG. 70, all directions are shown when viewed from above the surface layer, and by comparing each figure, the state of connection between each electrical component and pattern can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 65, the surface layer includes main electrical components such as connectors CN1C, CN2C, CN3C, CN4C, CN5C, CN6C, CN7C, CN8C, CN9C, CN10C, buffer circuit 504, motor drivers 510, 511, and S. Equipped with an LED driver 509 used as a /P conversion circuit, a diode D19C, a resistor R34C (identification information is "R34"), a capacitor C21C (identification information is "C21"), etc. that constitute a power supply isolation/protection circuit 521. .

The shape of the substrate is a rectangle that is close to a square and has a partially protruding portion (upper left in the drawing).
In the drawing, the connectors CN1C, CN2C, CN3C, CN4C, CN5C, CN6C, CN8C, and CN9C are arranged in the lower half of the board.
Connectors CN7C and CN10C are arranged in the protruding portion at the upper left side of the drawing.

The buffer circuit 504 performs buffer processing of the signal output from the connector CN1C (see FIG. 16), and is arranged near the connector CN1C .
The motor drivers 510, 511 and the power isolation/protection circuit 521 are arranged in the upper left part of the drawing in the rectangular area.
An LED driver 509 used as an S/P conversion circuit is arranged in the upper right part of the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main electrical components on the back layer include buffer circuits 501, 502, 503, 507, 508, 512, 513, P/S conversion circuits 505, 506, and a power isolation/protection circuit 520. A Schottky barrier diode D18C, a resistor R27C (identification information is "R27"), capacitors C12C and C13C (identification information is "C12" and "C13"), a chip varistor 515, and the like are mounted.

Buffer circuits 501, 502, 503, 513 and P/S conversion circuit 505 are arranged in the lower region of the substrate in the drawing.
The P/S conversion circuit 506 and the power supply isolation/protection circuit 520 are arranged approximately in the center region in the vertical direction in the drawing. Note that the P/S conversion circuit 506 is arranged close to the P/S conversion circuit 505.
Buffer circuits 507, 508, and 512 are arranged in the upper region of the substrate in the drawing.

FIG. 67 shows a conductor pattern on the surface layer, in which wiring and ground patterns 536 mainly corresponding to the components shown in FIG. 65 are formed. As shown in the figure, the ground pattern 536 is a solid ground.
Note that the part indicated as "○○+XXXX" actually displays the board management number.

FIG. 68 shows the conductor pattern of the first inner layer.
A power supply pattern 530 for 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is formed here.
Further, as a 12V system, power supply patterns 531, 532, and 533 corresponding to the power supply lines PLp, PLq, and PLr described in FIG. 57 are formed.
The power line PLp is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), the power line PLq is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS), and the power line PLr is a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V).
As illustrated, power supply patterns 530, 531, and 533 are solid power supply patterns.

Moreover, patterns 534 and 535 are formed in the first inner layer. These are wiring patterns for analog audio signals of the + terminal and - terminal of the middle right speaker, which are formed between connector CN2C and connector CN5C.

FIG. 69 shows the conductor pattern of the second inner layer, in which various wiring lines and a ground pattern 538 are formed. As shown in the figure, the ground pattern 538 is a solid ground.

FIG. 70 shows a conductor pattern on the back layer, in which wiring mainly corresponding to the components shown in FIG. 66 and a ground pattern 537 are formed. The ground pattern 537 is a solid ground.

In addition, in FIGS. 67 and 68, some parts of the pattern are cut off to show the leader lines of the codes, but this is for illustration purposes only, and the parts where the leader lines of the codes are shown are Note that the pattern of conductors is continuous.

Here, FIG. 67 shows lands 541, 542 that are connected to the 17th and 18th pins that are the ground terminals of the connector CN2C (FIG. 65), and the 5th, 7th, and 8th pins that are also the ground terminals. Lands 543, 544, 545 are shown that are joined to the pins.
As can be seen from the figure, these lands 541, 542, 543, 544, and 545 are connected to a ground pattern 536 that is a solid ground.

That is, as described above, the 17th pin, the 18th pin, the 5th pin, the 7th pin, and the 8th pin of the connector CN2C are connected to the solid ground.
In this way, by connecting the ground (17th pin, 18th pin), which is the boundary between the digital signal and analog signal, to the solid ground, the effect of shielding noise from high-frequency pulses from being mixed into the analog signal is increased. There is.
Although illustration of the conductor pattern for the inner frame LED relay board 400 is omitted, the ground (17th pin, 18th pin) that is the boundary between the digital signal and analog signal of the connector CN2B is also connected to the solid ground in the inner frame LED relay board 400. It is possible to connect to

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L1-4) in addition to the above (configuration L1-1), (configuration L1-2), and (configuration L1-3).
(Configuration L1-4)
The digital signal includes a serial data signal and a clock signal for performance control, and the analog signal is an audio signal supplied to a speaker.

At connectors CN2B, CN2C, and transmission line H8, digital signals include serial data signal S_IN_DATA, clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M (reset signals RESET_L, RESET_M), data signal DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose signal HANYOU, and enable signal ENABLE_M are transmitted.
Also, pins 19 to 26 of connectors CN2B and CN2C are assigned to the + and - terminals of the upper right speaker, middle right speaker, lower right speaker, upper left speaker, and middle left speaker, and analog audio signals are transmitted. .

According to the above-described configuration, the analog audio signal is separated from the digital data, particularly the high frequency serial data signal and clock signal.
Thereby, it is possible to effectively reduce the noise mixed into the speaker signal (audio signal), which is an analog signal, due to the influence of pulses as a digital signal, and to realize good audio performance.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L2-1).
(Configuration L2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, and a first connector and a second connector provided on the first board, and the first connector inputs a digital signal for presentation and an analog signal for presentation. A connector, and in the first board, the digital signal for presentation inputted from the first connector is supplied from the first connector to a presentation control circuit that controls presentation operation via wiring having a first line length. , the production analog signal inputted from the first connector is configured to be outputted from the second connector via wiring having a second line length shorter than the first line length. ing.

In this (configuration L2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 21) is assumed.
(Specific example 21)
・First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Production control circuit: LED driver 509 (S/P conversion circuit)
・First connector: Connector CN2C
・Second connector: Connector CN5C, CN6C, CN8C

The front frame LED connection board 500 sends digital data that is a high-frequency pulse input from the connector CN2C to an LED driver 509 (see FIGS. 19 and 22) used as an S/P conversion circuit that converts pulse timing. ing.
Further, the analog signal input from connector CN2C is sent to connectors CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C and output to the outside of the board (FIG. 15).

As shown in FIG. 65, connectors CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C are arranged near connector CN2C.
As is clear from the figure, the line length from the connector CN2C to the connectors CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C is shorter than the line length from the connector CN2C to the LED driver 509 (the line length via the buffer circuit 501).
Therefore, when the LED driver 509 (S/P conversion circuit) is used as the above production control circuit, and the connectors CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C are used as the above second connectors, the second line length is shorter than the first line length. It satisfies the relationship of becoming.

In such a configuration, an analog signal supplied from the upstream side is immediately output to the outside via a relay using connectors on the input side and output side and a short second line length wiring on the board between them ( It can be seen that the configuration is such that the output is output to a speaker).
Therefore, the analog signal becomes less susceptible to the radiation noise of high-frequency pulses caused by the digital signal on the substrate.

Further, in this configuration, the effect control circuit (LED driver 509) is placed on the board at a position away from the input side connector CN2C (for example, at the upper right position in FIG. 65). This is preferable in that it makes it easier to arrange the connectors CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C on the output side near the connector CN2C, and contributes to reducing the influence of noise on analog signals.

Further, the front frame LED connection board 500 of the embodiment forms solid ground ground patterns 536, 537, and 538 with the surface layer shown in FIG. 67, the second inner layer shown in FIG. 69, and the back surface layer shown in FIG. The wiring patterns between the components are surrounded by ground in the plane direction and the interlayer direction. The wiring patterns within the board are digital signal transmission paths except for the wiring patterns to the connectors CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C.
In other words, a shielding effect against high-frequency noise caused by digital signals is appropriately obtained within the board, which also contributes to reducing the influence of noise on analog signals.

Furthermore, it can be said that the fact that the power supply patterns 530, 531, 532, and 533 are grouped together in the first inner layer also contributes to appropriately surrounding the digital signal wiring with the solid ground pattern. In other words, in the layer where the digital signal wiring is formed, by not providing a solid power supply pattern, the area of the solid ground patterns 536, 537, and 538 can be increased.

Although the production control circuit has been described using an example of the LED driver 509 of the front frame LED connection board 500, the above (configuration L2-1) can be applied to other boards as well.
As the production control circuit, an LED driver, a motor driver, an S/P conversion circuit for production control signals, etc. are assumed. In addition, as the effect control circuit, a microcomputer chip, a DSP, or a logic circuit can be considered. In the case of a board that is provided with these and relays analog signals, it is desirable to apply (configuration L2-1) to at least one of the effect control circuits.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L2-2) in addition to the above (configuration L2-1).
(Configuration L2-2)
The digital signal includes a serial data signal and a clock signal for performance control, and the analog signal is an audio signal supplied to a speaker.

At connectors CN2B, CN2C, and transmission line H8, digital signals include serial data signal S_IN_DATA, clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M (reset signals RESET_L, RESET_M), data signal DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose signal HANYOU, and enable signal ENABLE_M are transmitted.
Also, pins 19 to 26 of connectors CN2B and CN2C are assigned to the + and - terminals of the upper right speaker, middle right speaker, lower right speaker, upper left speaker, and middle left speaker, and analog audio signals are transmitted. .

When analog audio signals are relayed, they are affected by noise from digital data, especially high-frequency serial data signals and clock signals, which causes noise in the reproduced audio. This configuration is desirable in the sense of avoiding such noise contamination on the board that relays audio signals.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L2-3) in addition to the above (configuration L2-1) or (configuration L2-2).
(Configuration L2-3)
The production control circuit is a serial/parallel (S/P) conversion circuit.

In the front frame LED connection board 500, digital data as a high frequency pulse input from the connector CN2C is sent to an LED driver 509 (see FIGS. 19 and 22) used as an S/P conversion circuit.
In particular, the wiring from the connector CN2C to the LED driver 509 used as an S/P conversion circuit is a wiring portion where serial data is transmitted and high frequency noise is likely to occur on the board. Considering the existence of such a route, it is important to note that the speaker signal, which is an analog signal, is relayed by the front frame LED connection board 500 and is immediately transmitted to the outside via extremely short wiring, which reduces the influence of noise. This is particularly effective in avoiding.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L3-1).
(Configuration L3-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, and a first connector and a second connector provided on the first board, and the first connector inputs a digital signal for presentation and an analog signal for presentation. In the first board, the digital signal for presentation inputted from the first connector is supplied to a presentation control circuit that controls presentation operation, and the analog signal for presentation inputted from the first connector is supplied to the presentation control circuit that controls presentation operation. is configured to be output from the second connector, and when viewed from the first connector, the second connector is arranged at a position closer to the production control circuit.

The above (Specific Example 21) is assumed as an example corresponding to this (Configuration L3-1).
As shown in FIG. 65, the connectors CN5C, CN6C, and CN8C as the second connectors are arranged closer to the LED driver 509 when viewed from the connector CN2C as the first connector. In other words, the line length of the analog signal line from the connector CN2C becomes shorter than the line length of the digital signal line.
Therefore, the front frame LED connection board 500 immediately transmits the analog signal relayed from upstream to downstream to the outside via the first connector on the input side and the second connector on the output side on the board and the short wiring between them. It can be output (output to speakers).
This makes the analog signal less susceptible to the radiation noise of high-frequency pulses caused by the digital signal on the board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L3-2) in addition to the above (configuration L3-1).
(Configuration L3-2)
The digital signal includes a serial data signal and a clock signal for performance control, and the analog signal is an audio signal supplied to a speaker.

In other words, it is similar to the example described in (Configuration L2-2), and is desirable in the sense of avoiding noise from high-frequency serial data signals and clock signals when relaying analog audio signals.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L3-3) in addition to the above (configuration L3-1) or (configuration L3-2).
(Configuration L3-3)
The production control circuit is a serial/parallel (S/P) conversion circuit.

This is also the same as the example described in (Configuration L2-3), and in the front frame LED connection board 500, the digital data as a high frequency pulse input from the connector CN2C is transferred to the LED driver 509 used as an S/P conversion circuit. (See FIGS. 19 and 22). When such a configuration is provided, the above (configuration L3-1) is particularly useful in avoiding the influence of noise.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L4-1).
(Configuration L4-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board having a multi-layer structure, and a first connector provided on the first board for inputting a digital signal for presentation and an analog signal for presentation. is configured such that a digital signal for presentation inputted from the first connector is supplied from the first connector to a presentation control circuit that controls presentation operation via a first wiring having a first line length; On the first board, an analog signal for presentation inputted from the first connector is connected to the analog signal terminal of the first connector from the first connector to a second line length shorter than the first line length. A second connector is arranged that is supplied by a second wiring formed in the same layer as the layer in which the pattern including the contacts is provided and outputs to the outside of the board.

In this (configuration L4-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 22) is assumed.
(Specific example 22)
・First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Production control circuit: LED driver 509 (S/P conversion circuit)
・First connector: Connector CN2C
・Second connector: Connector CN6C, CN8C

FIG. 67 shows two lands 546 to which the terminals of connector CN6C are bonded, and four lands 548 to which the terminals of connector CN8C are bonded.
As can be seen from FIG. 67, the two lands 546 are connected to the 24th pin and the 26th pin of the connector CN2C, respectively, and the four lands 548 are connected to the 19th pin, the 21st pin, the 23rd pin, and the 23rd pin of the connector CN2C, respectively. Connected from pin 25. These correspond to the above-mentioned second wiring formed in the surface layer.

In addition, the clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU, which are digital data signals input from the upstream side by the connector CN2C, and the enable signal ENABLE_M are the patterns of the surface layer, the second inner layer, the back layer, and these. The LED driver 509 is supplied to the LED driver 509 through wiring (first wiring) formed by through holes or vias between the two (see FIGS. 65, 15, and 19).

The analog signal for presentation is then relayed from the input side connector CN2C to the output side connectors (CN8C, CN6C) via the second wiring, and is output to other boards. This second wiring is only a surface layer pattern.
In other words, when comparing the first line length of the first wiring and the second line length of the second wiring, the second line length is clearly shorter.

In this way, the front frame LED connection board 500 receives the analog signal for presentation input from the connector CN2C from the connector CN2C with the second line length shorter than the first line length, and the analog signal terminal of the connector CN2C ( 24th pin, 26th pin, or 19th pin, 21st pin, 23rd pin, 25th pin) The second wiring formed in the same surface layer of FIG. 67 as the layer provided with the pattern including the contact point Connectors CN6C and CN8C are arranged to supply the signal to the outside of the board.

Therefore, the analog signal is relayed over a very short distance from connector CN2C to connector CN8C or connector CN6C without crossing layers.
This makes it possible to function as a relay board for analog signals while making it less susceptible to radiation noise caused by digital data.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L4-2) in addition to the above (configuration L4-1).
(Configuration L4-2)
The digital signal includes a serial data signal and a clock signal for performance control, and the analog signal is an audio signal supplied to a speaker.

In other words, it is similar to the example described in (Configuration L2-2), and is desirable in the sense of avoiding noise from high-frequency serial data signals and clock signals when relaying analog audio signals.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration L4-3) in addition to the above (configuration L4-1) or (configuration L4-2).
(Configuration L4-3)
The production control circuit is a serial/parallel (S/P) conversion circuit.

This is also the same as the example described in (Configuration L2-3), and in the front frame LED connection board 500, the digital data as a high frequency pulse input from the connector CN2C is transferred to the LED driver 509 used as an S/P conversion circuit. (See FIGS. 19 and 22). When such a configuration is provided, the above (configuration L4-1) is particularly useful in avoiding the influence of noise.

[6.12 Analog signal relay/wiring]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration M1).
(Configuration M1)
The gaming machine 1 has a first board having an input side connector for inputting a digital signal for performance and a speaker drive signal, and the first board connects the digital signal for performance to wiring provided on the first board. After processing the signal with other electronic circuit components, it is output from the output side connector to another board, and the speaker drive signal is supplied from the input side connector to the output side connector via only wiring to drive the speaker outside the board. It is configured to output to.

In this (configuration M1), the following corresponding example (specific example 23) is assumed.
(Specific example 23)
・First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Input side connector: Connector CN2C
・Digital signals: Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, clock signals S_IN_CLK, load signals S_IN_LOAD
・Speaker drive signal: Drive signal for upper right speaker, middle right speaker, upper left speaker, middle left speaker ・Output side connector for digital signal: Connector CN1C, CN3C, CN10C
・Output side connector for speaker drive signal: Connector CN5C, CN6C, CN8C
・Electronic circuit components other than wiring: electronic circuit components such as buffer circuits 501, 504, 502, 503, 512, LED driver 509, motor drivers 510, 511, resistors, capacitors, etc.

Note that "wiring" refers to things that electrically connect parts on a board, such as printed patterns, solid patterns, through holes, vias, jumper wires, and specific conductor parts.
Then, the speaker drive signal is supplied from the input side connector to the output side connector via only the wiring, which means that the speaker drive signal is transmitted to the front frame LED connection board 500, for example, to the buffer circuits 501, 504, 502, 503. , 512, LED driver 509, motor drivers 510, 511, etc., or electronic circuit components such as resistors and capacitors, it is supplied from the input side connector to the output side connector.
In other words, the speaker drive signal is supplied from the input side connector to the output side connector without any processing by any electronic circuit components other than the wiring (of course excluding the effects of the resistance and capacitance components of the wiring), and the signal is sent to the speaker outside the board. It can also be said to be an output configuration.

The front frame LED connection board 500 serves as a relay circuit for both the speaker drive signal and the digital signal, and the speaker drive signal is directly sent to the speaker (see FIG. 15).
As for digital data for presentation, a stable supply will be achieved by performing the necessary signal processing (buffering, etc.) for use on downstream boards. This creates a board that can both relay speaker signals and process digital signals, reducing the number of boards and making the board configuration of gaming machines more efficient and simpler.
Additionally, the speaker drive signal is designed to be output externally without signal processing in electronic circuit components, making it suitable for relay applications. This is a configuration that can be easily adopted as a speaker wiring relay for various types of boards, and is useful for simplifying the configuration of complicated boards and the like inside the game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration M2).
(Configuration M2)
The gaming machine 1 has a first board having an input side connector for inputting a digital signal for performance and an analog signal for performance, and the first board is provided with a digital signal for performance on the first board. After processing the signal using electronic circuit components other than the wiring, it is output from the output side connector to multiple other boards, and the analog signal for production is supplied from the input side connector to the output side connector via only the wiring. The configuration is such that it is output to the outside of the board.

As an example corresponding to this (configuration M2), the above (specific example 23) in which the first board is the front frame LED connection board 500 is assumed.
Note that the analog signals for presentation correspond to speaker drive signals, that is, drive signals for the upper right speaker, middle right speaker, upper left speaker, and middle left speaker.
In addition, digital signals for presentation are output from multiple output-side connectors called connectors CN1C, CN3C, and CN10C to multiple other boards (the LED board mentioned in FIG. 16, the relay board 550, and the button LED connection board 640). be done.

Such a front frame LED connection board 500 serves as a relay circuit for both a speaker drive signal and a digital signal, and the speaker drive signal is sent to the speaker as it is. On the other hand, digital data for presentation can be stably supplied by performing necessary signal processing (buffering, etc.) for use in multiple downstream boards.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration M3).
(Configuration M3)
The gaming machine 1 has a first board having an input side connector for inputting a serial data signal and a clock signal for performance as well as inputting a speaker drive signal, and the first board has a serial data signal and a clock signal for performance. The signal is processed by an electronic circuit component other than the wiring provided on the first board, and then outputted from the output side connector to a plurality of other boards, and the speaker drive signal is transmitted from the input side connector only via the wiring. The configuration is such that the signal is supplied to the output side connector and output to the outside of the board.

As an example corresponding to this (configuration M3), the above (specific example 23) in which the first board is the front frame LED connection board 500 is assumed.
However, the "serial data signal" corresponds to the data signals DATA_L and DATA_M among digital signals, and the "clock signal" corresponds to the clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, and S_IN_CLK among the digital signals. .
The output side connectors for these serial data signals and clock signal numbers are connectors CN1C, CN3C, and CN10C.

Such a front frame LED connection board 500 serves as a relay circuit for both a speaker drive signal and a digital signal, and the speaker drive signal is sent to the speaker as it is.
On the other hand, since serial data signals and clock signals for presentation are used by a plurality of downstream boards, a stable supply can be realized by performing necessary signal processing (buffering, etc.).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration M4).
(Configuration M4)
The gaming machine 1 has a first board having an input side connector for inputting a digital signal for presentation and a speaker drive signal, and the first board inputs a digital signal for presentation to a buffer provided on the first substrate. A configuration in which the circuit processes the signal and outputs it from the output side connector to multiple other boards, and then supplies the speaker drive signal from the input side connector to the output side connector via only wiring and outputs it to the outside of the board. It is said that

As an example corresponding to this (configuration M4), the above (specific example 23) in which the first board is the front frame LED connection board 500 is assumed.
However, the buffer circuits 501, 502, 503, 504, and 512 correspond to the buffer circuits.
In addition, digital signals for presentation are output from multiple output-side connectors called connectors CN1C, CN3C, and CN10C to multiple other boards (the LED board mentioned in FIG. 16, the relay board 550, and the button LED connection board 640). be done.

Such a front frame LED connection board 500 serves as a relay circuit for both a speaker drive signal and a digital signal, and the speaker drive signal is sent to the speaker as it is.
On the other hand, digital signals for presentation are buffered and then output from the output connector to multiple boards on the downstream side. By performing buffer processing in this manner, it becomes suitable as a relay for stably sending digital signals to a plurality of downstream boards.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration M5).
(Configuration M5)
The gaming machine 1 has a first board having an input side connector for inputting a digital signal for performance and a speaker drive signal, and the first board connects the digital signal for performance to wiring provided on the first board. After processing the signal with other electronic circuit components, it is output from the output side connector to another board, and the speaker drive signal is supplied from the input side connector to the output side connector via only wiring to drive the speaker outside the board. The pin assignment of the input side connector is such that when the boundary is a predetermined pin assigned for ground, all digital signals exist in one direction when viewed from the boundary. All speaker drive signals are assigned to pins located in the other direction from the boundary.

As an example corresponding to this (configuration M5), the above (specific example 23) in which the first board is the front frame LED connection board 500 is assumed.
As described above (configuration L1-1), the 17th pin and 18th pin of the connector CN2C, which corresponds to the input side connector, are shown in FIGS. It becomes a pin.

Such a front frame LED connection board 500 serves as a relay circuit for both the speaker drive signal and the digital signal, and the speaker drive signal is sent as is to the speaker (see FIG. 15).
As for digital data for presentation, a stable supply will be achieved by performing the necessary signal processing (buffering, etc.) for use on downstream boards.
Moreover, the connector CN2C on the input side is separated into the digital data side and the speaker side by a boundary formed by the ground terminal (see FIG. 64).
That is, in the path of the connector CN2B, the transmission line H8, and the connector CN2C, the digital signal and the analog signal are separated into one and the other using the 17th pin and the 18th pin as boundaries. This reduces noise mixed into analog signals (for example, audio signals supplied to speakers) due to the influence of pulses as digital signals, and achieves good performance.
Therefore, as a relay board equipped with a connector for inputting both digital data and speaker drive, effective noise countermeasures can be taken.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration M6).
(Configuration M6)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a first board attached to the inner frame 2, and a first board attached to the door 6. a second board configured to transmit a digital signal for performance and a speaker drive signal from the first board to the second board, and a second board that transmits a digital signal for performance and a speaker drive signal. It has an input side connector for inputting signals, and outputs the digital signal for presentation to another board from the output side connector after signal processing is performed using electronic circuit components other than the wiring provided on the second board , A speaker drive signal is supplied from the input side connector to the output side connector via only wiring, and is output to a speaker outside the board.

In this (configuration M6), the following corresponding example (specific example 24) is assumed.
(Specific example 24)
・First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
In addition, "input side connector", "digital signal", "speaker drive signal", "output side connector for digital signal", "output side connector for speaker drive signal", and "electronic circuit parts other than wiring" on the second board are This is the same as (Specific Example 23) described above.

In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 serving as the second board can achieve the same effect as the above-mentioned (configuration M1), and between the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500, the inner frame 2 and the boundary between the door 6 (transmission line H8), and it is desirable to transmit digital signals and analog signals together. In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 serves as a relay circuit for both the speaker drive signal and the digital signal, and the speaker drive signal is sent to the speaker as it is. In addition, by performing the necessary signal processing (buffer, etc.) for digital data for use in one or more downstream boards, stable supply and suitable transmission for the opening/closing part of the door 6 can be achieved. I have to.

[6.13 Pattern configuration]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N1-1).
(Configuration N1-1)
The gaming machine 1 has a multilayer structure including a surface layer forming a front surface, a back layer forming a back surface, and one or more inner layers formed between the surface layer and the back layer. 1 substrate, and at least one of the inner layers has a conductor pattern formed to a position closer to the edge of the substrate than the front layer or the back layer .

In this (configuration N1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 25) is assumed.
(Specific example 25)
・First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Surface layer: Surface layer whose pattern is shown in FIG. 67 ・Back layer: Back layer whose pattern is shown in FIG. 70 ・Inner layer: First inner layer and second inner layer whose patterns are shown in FIGS. 68 and 69

65, FIG. 66, FIG. 67, FIG. 68, FIG. 69, and FIG. They are shown as LW, left end LS, and right end RS.
Here, the hatched portions in FIGS. 65 and 66 (near the upper end UP, lower end LW, left end LS, and right end RS) are areas where no conductive pattern is formed in the front and back layers. Shows the configured part.
As shown in FIGS. 67 and 70, patterns are formed on the front and back layers, avoiding the hatched areas in FIGS. 65 and 66.

On the other hand, in the first inner layer shown in FIG. 68, the pattern is formed in the vicinity of the upper end UP and left end LS so as to extend into the areas corresponding to the hatched areas in the front and back layers.
Further, in the second inner layer shown in FIG. 69, the areas near the upper end UP, left end LS, and right end RS are patterned so as to extend into areas corresponding to the hatched areas in the front and back layers.
In other words, the conductor pattern is formed in the first inner layer and the second inner layer to a position closer to the edge of the substrate than in the front layer and the back layer .

For the front and back layers, there is a possibility that there will be parts that come into contact with peripheral parts made of resin or metal, so prohibited areas are set where patterns are not drawn.
On the other hand, there is no need to consider the inner layer's contact with surrounding parts. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the area of the pattern is set to be larger than that of the front layer and the back layer.
This makes it possible to facilitate pattern layout on the inner layer, increase the degree of freedom in layout, and form thick wiring patterns.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N1-2) in addition to the above (configuration N1-1).
(Configuration N1-2)
In the inner layer, a pattern as a solid ground or a solid power source is formed up to a position close to the edge of the substrate.

In the first inner layer of FIG. 68, a power supply pattern 531 as a solid power supply is formed up to a position close to the upper end UP, right end RS side, and a power supply pattern 530 as a solid power supply is formed on the upper end UP, the left end LS, It is formed to a position close to the lower end LW side.
These power supply patterns 530 and 531 are used up to a position close to the edge of the board, which is a prohibited area on the front and back layers, and are used as a solid power supply with as wide an area as possible, so that the current capacity can be secured as much as possible. ing.

Further, in the second inner layer in FIG. 69, a ground pattern 538 as a solid ground is formed up to a position close to each of the upper end UP, left end LS, lower end LW, and right end RS.
In this way, the ground pattern 538 is used up to a position close to the edge of the substrate, which is a prohibited area on the front and back layers, and is made into a solid ground with as wide an area as possible, so that the current capacity of the ground can be secured. I have to.

In other words, in the front frame LED connection board 500, by forming a solid power supply pattern and a solid ground pattern using the inner surface layer, a solid pattern with a wider area can be realized.
Note that in addition to the prohibited area, it is usually possible to set rules for the area where the pattern is to be formed, such as a margin of 1 mm or more. For this reason, even in the inner layer where no prohibited area is set, it is conceivable to form a pattern with a margin of 1 mm or the like as a limit until it reaches the edge of the substrate.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N2-1).
(Configuration N2-1)
The gaming machine 1 has a multilayer structure including a surface layer forming a front surface, a back layer forming a back surface, and one or more inner layers formed between the surface layer and the back layer. A first solid power supply pattern serving as wiring for a first power supply voltage and a second solid power supply pattern serving as wiring for a second power supply voltage are formed on one of the inner layers. .

In this (configuration N2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 26) is assumed.
(Specific example 26)
・First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・Surface layer: Surface layer whose pattern is shown in FIG. 67 ・Back layer: Back layer whose pattern is shown in FIG. 70 ・Inner layer: First inner layer whose pattern is shown in FIG. 68 ・First power supply voltage: 5V DC voltage ( DC5VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・First solid power pattern: power pattern 530
・Second solid power pattern: power pattern 531

In the front frame LED connection board 500, the wiring for 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is formed as a wide solid power supply by using the first inner layer, as shown in FIG. patterns 530, 531).

Since the front frame LED connection board 500 supplies power to many downstream boards and the amount of current increases, it is desirable to configure a solid power supply pattern. Moreover, as described above, the power supply wiring for the 5V system and the 12V system is provided, but it is desired that these multiple power supply systems each have a solid power supply pattern. In order to use solid power patterns for each of multiple power supply systems, securing the board area is an issue, but by using the inner layer of the board, it is easy to create solid power patterns regardless of the need for complex circuit pattern wiring. We are making it possible to achieve this goal.

In particular, the front frame LED connection board 500 is a relay board on which a speaker drive signal as an analog signal and digital data for LED lighting effect and motor effect are mixed. In this case, it is desirable to separate the analog signal from the digital signal in order to reduce noise, but if the board area is relatively small, it is likely to be difficult to separate components and wiring. By performing the power supply wiring using the first inner layer, it becomes possible to design an appropriate component arrangement pattern in response to such circumstances.

Further, in the front frame LED connection board 500 of the embodiment, solid ground ground patterns 536, 537, and 538 are formed by the surface layer shown in FIG. 67, the second inner layer shown in FIG. 69, and the back surface layer shown in FIG. By enclosing the wiring pattern between each electronic circuit component in the plane direction and in the interlayer direction, a shielding effect against high frequency noise caused by digital signals is obtained.
In order to appropriately form such a solid ground, it is preferable to form the solid power supply patterns in a concentrated manner in the first inner layer. This is because there is an area margin for forming a solid ground in other layers.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N2-2) in addition to the above (configuration N2-1).
(Configuration N2-2)
The first board includes a first power supply terminal assigned to the first power supply voltage transmitted from another board, and a second power supply terminal assigned to the second power supply voltage transmitted from another board. A first connector having a terminal is attached, and the first connector is attached on the first board at a position spanning the first solid power pattern and the second solid power pattern when viewed in the thickness direction of the board. ing.

Considering the front frame LED connection board 500 according to the above (specific example 26), the first connector is the connector CN2C.
The first power supply terminals correspond to the first and third pins, which are terminals of 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). The second power supply terminals correspond to the 27th pin, the 28th pin, the 29th pin, and the 30th pin, which are 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminals.

As can be seen from FIGS. 65 and 68, in the connector CN2C, the left side of the case (the side with the smaller pin number) is located above the power supply pattern 530, and the right side of the case (the side with the larger pin number) is located above the power supply pattern 531. It is arranged so that
As a result, wiring from the connector CN2C to the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) power supply pattern 530 and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) power supply pattern 531 can be easily realized using interlayer vias.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N2-3) in addition to the above (configuration N2-1) or (configuration N2-2).
(Configuration N2-3)
A power supply pattern for a third power supply voltage separated from the first or second power supply voltage via a protection circuit is formed on the first substrate in the same layer as the first solid power pattern and the second solid power pattern. is formed.

Considering the front frame LED connection board 500 according to the above (specific example 26), the protection circuit is the power separation/protection circuit 520 or the power separation/protection circuit 521, and the third power supply voltage is the 12V motor drive voltage. (MOT12V) or 12V DC voltage (DC12VS).
As shown in FIG. 68, a power supply pattern 533 constituting a power supply line PLr of a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is formed in the first inner layer.
Further, a power supply pattern 532 constituting a power supply line PLq of 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is formed in the first inner layer.

In this way, when three or more power supply voltages are used, by adopting a configuration in which the power supply patterns are concentrated on the inner layer, it is easier to separate the analog and digital electronic components and design patterns for noise reduction. Become desirable.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N3-1).
(Configuration N3-1)
The gaming machine 1 has a first board provided with a first driver circuit for performing a light emission effect and a second driver circuit for performing a movable object effect. A first power supply pattern that supplies an input first power supply voltage of a predetermined level to the first driver circuit, and a second power supply voltage that is separated from the first power supply voltage via a protection circuit, and a second power supply pattern that supplies the first power supply voltage of a predetermined level to the second driver circuit. a second power supply pattern is formed, a distance x between the electrical components constituting the protection circuit and the electrical components constituting the first driver circuit; When the separation distance between the electrical components constituting the second driver circuit is y, x>y.

Here, a modified example of the configuration of the front frame LED connection board 500 is shown in FIG.
In the explanation so far, the LED driver 509 of the front frame LED connection board 500 performs serial/parallel conversion for driving the motor (see FIGS. 57 and 19), but in FIG. 71. An example is shown in which the LED driver 509 is used for LED lighting effects.

Although FIG. 71 only shows a 12V power supply system, for example, the connector CN1C supplies a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the light emitting section 951 of another board 950, and the power supply voltage for driving the LED in the light emitting section 951 is do.
The LED driver 509 (although the signal line is not shown in FIG. 71) supplies a light emission drive signal to each LED of the light emitting section 951 of the other board 950 via the connector CN1C.

Even in the case of such a configuration, a power supply pattern can be formed in the inner layer of the front frame LED connection board 500 as shown in FIG. 68.

On the premise of the above modification, the following corresponding example (specific example 27) is assumed for the above (configuration N3-1).
(Specific example 27)
・First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) or motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Separation/protection circuit 520, 521
- First driver circuit: LED driver 509 in Figure 71
-Second driver circuit: motor driver 510, 511 in Figure 71
・First power pattern: power pattern 531
・Second power pattern: power pattern 532, 533

When considering the isolation/protection circuit 520, its electrical components are a Schottky barrier diode D18C, a resistor R27C, capacitors C12C and C13C, and a chip varistor 515 shown in FIG.
For example, FIG. 65 shows the separation distance x1 between the LED driver 509 and the Schottky barrier diode D18C in FIG. The distance y1 is shown. Obviously x1>y1. Even if the distance in the interlayer direction is taken into consideration, the above-mentioned x>y holds true.

Further, when considering the isolation/protection circuit 521, its electrical components are a diode D19C, a resistor R34C, and a capacitor C21C shown in FIG. 65.
Comparing the separation distance x2 between the LED driver 509 and the diode D19C when viewed in the plane direction and the separation distance y2 between the motor driver 511 and the capacitor C21C when viewed in the plane direction, it is clear that x2>y2, and the above x> y holds true.

As shown in FIG. 71 as well as FIG. 57, in the front frame LED connection board 500, from the 12V power supply voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the upstream, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is converted to 12V by the power supply isolation/protection circuits 520 and 521. A direct current voltage (DC12VS) is separated, power lines PLq and PLr are formed and supplied to motor drivers 510 and 511.

In other words, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are separately wired as a power supply from the position separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) (the position of the power supply separation/protection circuits 520 and 521), but the >y, the wiring lengths of power supply lines PLq and PLr can be shortened (see FIG. 68).

By making the power supply wiring as short as possible after being separated in this way, wiring resistance can be suppressed and appropriate power supply can be performed. In addition, it is advantageous for wiring the first power line (PLp) and forming a solid power supply pattern.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N3-2) in addition to the above (configuration N3-1).
(Configuration N3-2)
One or both of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is output to the outside of the substrate.

Considering the front frame LED connection board 500 in FIG. 71 according to the above (specific example 27), the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the first power supply voltage, is outputted to the outside from the connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C. .
Furthermore, when the second power supply voltage is considered as a motor drive voltage (MOT12V), it is outputted to the outside from the connector CN10C as shown in FIG.
Therefore, both the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage are output to the outside of the board.

Further, when the second power supply voltage is considered to be a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS), since this is not outputted to the outside, the configuration is such that only the first power supply voltage is outputted to the outside of the board.

The front frame LED connection board 500 outputs 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the connector CN to downstream boards and devices. With this configuration, even downstream motors and LED boards can It is possible to use different power sources.
It is also possible to adopt such a configuration for other boards such as the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N4-1).
(Configuration N4-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board, a second board, and a third board, and the second board receives a first power supply voltage, a second power supply voltage, and an effect control signal from the first board. an input side connector to which the first board and ground wiring are connected, and a pattern wiring that supplies the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage to electronic components provided on the board; an output side connector that outputs the first power supply voltage, the second power supply voltage, and a production control signal to the third board, and to which the third board and ground wiring are connected; In the connector, the first power supply voltage is assigned to a pin on one end side, and the second power supply voltage is assigned to a pin on the other end side.

In this (configuration N4-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 28) is assumed.
(Specific example 28)
・First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
- Third board: relay board 550, button LED connection board 640, LED board (not shown: connection destination of connector CN1C)
・Input side connector: Connector CN2C
・Output side connector: Connector CN3C, CN10C, CN1C
・First power supply voltage: 5V DC voltage (DC5VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Pins on one end: 1st pin, 3rd pin ・Pins on the other end: 27th pin to 30th pin

Power supply patterns are often wider than wiring patterns for signal transmission.
When wiring multiple types of power supply systems and grounds in patterns on a board, supplying power to circuits on the board, and transmitting power supply voltage and performance control signals to downstream boards, it is extremely difficult to route the power supply patterns. become.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 64, in the input side connector CN2C, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is assigned to the 1st and 3rd pins at the left corner of the diagram, and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is assigned to the right corner of the diagram. It is assigned to four pins from the 27th pin to the 30th pin.

By inputting the power supply voltage at a position as far away as possible in this way, it is possible to simplify the routing of the power supply wiring. In particular, power supply wiring requires a lot of wiring to supply power to each electronic circuit component, so when inputting multiple power supply voltages, separating them at both ends of the connector is suitable for simplifying pattern design. .

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration N4-2) in addition to the above-mentioned (configuration N4-1).
(Configuration N4-2)
A solid power supply pattern is formed as the first power supply voltage or the second power supply voltage.

Power supply patterns 530 and 531, which are solid power supply patterns in FIG. 68, correspond to this configuration.
By assigning the input 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to both ends of connector CN2C so that they are separated from each other, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) can be set as shown in Figure 68. It is possible to easily form the power supply patterns 530 and 531 of the solid power supply.

Furthermore, since the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) are assigned to each end of the connector CN2C, pattern formation is possible even when only one of them is used as a solid power supply. It becomes easier.

[6.14 Others]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment further has the following various configurations.

(Configuration Z1)
The LED board 780 in FIG. 45 receives a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as power supply voltages from the upstream relay board 760 through the connector CN1N.
A 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) is used as a power source for the buffer circuit 781, and a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) is used as a power source for the LED driver 782.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is output from the connector CN2N to the downstream LED board 790 (see FIG. 11).
This improves the efficiency of power supply.

(Configuration Z2)
The inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG. 13 outputs a signal for effect control from the effect control board 30 to each board of the door 6, but also includes a signal for the speaker 46.

In this case, the signals for production control are clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, serial data signal S_IN_DATA, clear signal CLR_L, clear signal CLR_M, clock signal CLK_L, clock signal CLK_M, data signal DATA_L, data signal DATA_M, and general purpose. Output port, enable signal ENABLE_M.

The signals for the speaker 46 are signals from the 19th pin to the 26th pin of the connector CN1B, the + terminal and the - terminal of the upper right speaker, middle right speaker, lower right speaker, upper left speaker, and middle left speaker, respectively.
Further, the 19th to 26th pins of the connector CN2B are also signals for the speaker.

Here, the 17th pin and the 18th pin of both the connectors CN1B and CN2B are grounded.
As a result, in the transmission line H7, connector CN1B, connector CN2B, and transmission line H8, a ground is provided between the lines of the speaker signal, that is, the audio signal, and the above-mentioned signal for controlling the production, that is, the high frequency signal. It turns out.
Thereby, a shielding effect can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce the influence of high frequency noise generated by high frequency signals for performance control on the audio signal.
Furthermore, this allows signals for performance control and speaker signals to be transmitted through the same wiring, improving wiring efficiency.

(Configuration Z3)
Harnesses connected to movable objects often use flexible cables that do not easily break even after repeated movement, or wires that are softer than usual.
Soft wire has the characteristics of being more durable, more expensive, and can carry almost the same amount of current as regular wire. On the other hand, flexible cables are expensive and can only carry a small amount of current.
Due to the structure of the movable body, the harness has a large amount of deflection, and when I want to control the direction of deflection, I use a flexible cable. This is because it is difficult to control the bending of soft wires.

(Configuration Z4)
The connectors CN1C and CN4C in FIG. 16 will be described.
Downstream of the front frame LED connection board 500, there are two LED boards (an LED board not shown and an LED board in the handle) connected to the connectors CN1C and CN4C. In this case, one of the two LED boards is equipped with an LED driver. As described above, the front frame LED connection board 500 transmits a signal for LED control from the connector CN1C to the LED driver of one LED board, and receives the LED light emission drive current (17-R6, 17- G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) and transmits it to the other LED board from connector CN4C.

In other words, if there are two LED boards (second and third boards) downstream of the first board (front frame LED connection board 500) and an LED driver is mounted on one of them (the second board), The configuration is such that a drive control signal is transmitted from one board, a part of the LED drive signal is returned from the LED driver of the second board, and is relayed and sent to the other LED board (third board).

As a result, only one LED driver is required for driving the second and third boards, which facilitates the simplification of the configuration and the downsizing of the downstream LED board.
Furthermore, since light emission is controlled using a common control signal, it is only necessary to send a drive control signal from the first substrate to the second substrate, resulting in good wiring efficiency.
Further, by relaying the signal using the first board, a harness between the second board and the third board becomes unnecessary.

(Configuration Z5)
As shown in FIG. 36, FIG. 39, FIG. 40, and FIG. DATA_P) is transferred to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703 and the buffer circuit (any one of 705, 706, 707, and 708).

That is, the clock signal CLK_P and the serial data signal DATA_P are buffered by the buffer circuit 703 and are converted into the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 706 in FIG. 40, and outputted from the connector CN7J as the clock signal CLK_E and the serial data signal DATA_E.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 705 in FIG. 39, and output as the clock signal CLK_B and the serial data signal DATA_B from the connector CN10J.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 707 in FIG. 41, and output as the clock signal CLK_D and the serial data signal DATA_D from the connector CN9J.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 708 in FIG. 41, and output as the clock signal CLK_C and the serial data signal DATA_C from the connector CN8J.

In this way, the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are first buffered at the reception stage, then branched into four systems, buffered and output at the output stage of each system.
In this way, when an input signal is branched into multiple systems and output, stable signal transmission is achieved by performing buffer processing at the input stage and at each output stage of the multiple systems.

(Configuration Z6)
FIG. 72 shows the configuration of the substrate 1000.
This board 1000 is an example having a connector CN1U connected to an upstream board and a connector CN2U connected to a downstream board. Of course, it is also possible to connect to a plurality of downstream boards.

In this example, it is assumed that a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), a digital signal group SA, a digital signal group SB, and a speaker signal group SPS are supplied to the connector CN1U from the upstream board.

A DC/DC converter 1001 is provided on the substrate 1000. The DC/DC converter 1001 receives a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input from the connector CN2C as a primary side, and outputs a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) on a secondary side.
Note that the DC/DC converter 1001 is assumed to be, for example, a step-down switching converter, but may also generate a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) by, for example, resistor division.

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input from the connector CN2C is used as an operating power source for the LED driver 1004 and the light emitting unit 1005, for example.
The 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) obtained by the DC/DC converter 1001 is used as an operating power source for the buffer circuit 1002.
Further, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN2U to the downstream board.

The digital signal group SA includes, for example, signals that control light emitting operations and motor operations for production, sensing signals, etc., and specifically includes clock signals, reset/load signals, data signals (for example, serial data signals), and various A detection signal from a sensor is assumed.
This digital signal group SA includes, for example, signals transmitted from an upstream board to a downstream board via connectors CN1U and CN2U, and signals transmitted from a downstream board to an upstream board via connectors CN2U and CN1U. There may be a signal that
Here, an example is shown in which the board 1000 transmits the digital signal group SA as a relay between the upstream side and the downstream side. That is, this is an example in which the board 1000 does not process the signals of the digital signal group SA, but merely relays the signals.

The digital signal group SB is a signal for controlling, for example, a light emitting operation or a motor operation for presentation, and specifically, a clock signal, a reset/load signal, a data signal (for example, a serial data signal), etc. are assumed.
This digital signal group SB is transmitted, for example, from the upstream board to the downstream board via connectors CN1U and CN2U, and is used as a control signal for the LED driver 1004.

Each signal of the digital signal group SB is compensated by a buffer 1002 and then branched or distributed and supplied to a filter 1003 and an LED driver 1004.

Among the signals of the digital signal group SB, the signals to be transmitted to the downstream board are supplied from the buffer 1002 to the filter 1003. The filter 1003 is, for example, a low-pass filter, and cuts high-frequency noise. Note that a low-pass filter is used as an example, and the type of filter, cutoff characteristics, etc. may be determined depending on the type of signal.
Of the digital signal group SB, each signal processed by the filter 1003 is transmitted to the downstream board via the connector CN2U.
Although the filter 1003 is assumed to be a filter circuit using passive elements (resistors, capacitors, coils, etc.), it is also possible to configure a filter circuit using active elements. In that case, a 5V direct current voltage (DC5V) or a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) can be used as the power supply voltage.

A part or all of each signal of the digital signal group SB is supplied to the LED driver 1004. The LED driver 1004 drives the LED of the light emitting unit 1005 to emit light based on the input signal.

The speaker signal group SPS is a positive polarity signal and a negative polarity signal as a speaker drive signal (analog audio signal) for a certain speaker. Of course, the signal may be a speaker drive signal for a plurality of speakers. This speaker signal group SPS is transmitted to a downstream speaker or a relay board to the speaker via connectors CN1U and CN2U.
In this case, the board 1000 does not perform signal processing on the speaker signal group SPS, and the board 1000 has a function of simply relaying the speaker signal group SPS.

The substrate 1000 as shown in FIG. 72 has the following characteristics.
・Using a certain input power supply voltage (12V DC voltage (DC12VB)), generate a power supply voltage with a different voltage (5V DC voltage (DC5V)), and use both voltages as the power supply for circuit operation within the board 1000. It is used as Furthermore, other power supply voltages may be generated.
・Using a certain input power supply voltage (12V DC voltage (DC12VB)), generate power supply voltages with different voltages (5V DC voltage (DC5V)), and transmit only one voltage to the downstream side from connector CN2U. ing. Note that an example in which both voltages are transmitted to the downstream side is also conceivable.

- Each signal of the digital signal group SA is relayed between upstream and downstream without being processed within the board 1000 (without passing through electronic circuit components other than wiring).

- The digital signal group SB is buffered by the buffer circuit 1002 on the input side, further filtered by the filter 1003, and then transmitted from the connector CN2U to the downstream board. As a result, the signal to be transmitted downstream can be supplied to the downstream board after signal deterioration compensation (waveform shaping) and noise reduction have been performed.
- The digital signal group SB is input to the LED driver 1004 within the board 1000, and the LED light emission is driven. In other words, the board 1000 has both the functions of a board for producing light emission and a board for relaying. Note that each signal of the digital signal group SB may be supplied to a motor driver, an S/P conversion circuit, or the like instead of the LED driver on the board 1000.
- The signal supplied to the LED driver 1004 and the signal supplied to the filter 1003 are both processed by the buffer 1002, thereby compensating for signal deterioration during transmission from the upstream side.

- Input each signal of the digital signal group SA that is simply relayed without signal processing and each signal of the digital signal group SB that undergoes signal processing, and relay the signals of the digital signal groups SA and SB, as well as the digital signal group SB. It is said to be a board that performs performance operations based on signals.

- Each analog signal of the speaker signal group SPS is relayed between upstream and downstream (for example, a speaker) without being processed within the board 1000 (without passing through electronic circuit components other than wiring).

Any one or more of the features of such a board 1000 may be the above-mentioned inner frame LED relay board 400, front frame LED connection board 500, side unit upper right LED board 600, side unit lower right LED board 620. , side unit upper LED board 630, button LED connection board 640, button LED board 660 button, LED connection board 700, back left relay board 720, decoration board 740, relay board 760, LED board 780, LED board 790, back of board The present invention can be applied to other substrates including the lower relay substrate 800, the decorative substrate 820, or a substrate not shown.

Furthermore, any of the configurations from (configuration A1-1) to (configuration Z5) described above can also be applied to the substrate 1000 as shown in FIG.
Alternatively, a substrate in which one or more of the features of the substrate 1000 described above is combined with the configurations from (configuration A1-1) to (configuration Z5) described above is also envisioned.

The embodiments have been described above, but each of the configuration examples from (Configuration A1-1) to (Configuration Z6) above can be combined in various ways, and by combining them arbitrarily, the effects explained for each configuration can be achieved. The gaming machine 1 can have the following functions.
In addition, it is also possible to combine the configurations and operations described in the embodiments.
Moreover, the various illustrated specific examples are only one mode of realizing each configuration. There are various possible specific examples that are not specifically specified.

Further, although the embodiment has been described using a pachinko game machine, the present invention can also be applied to a reel type game machine such as a so-called slot game machine.
The drum type game machine also has a frame member, a door member provided to be openable and closable with respect to the frame member, and a replacement member attached to the frame member so as to be replaceable.
For example, a reel type gaming machine has a frame housing as a structure corresponding to a frame member, a door as a structure corresponding to a door member, and a reel unit as a structure corresponding to a replacement member. For example, the frame casing constitutes the main body of the reel-type gaming machine, and the reel unit is attached to the frame casing directly or via a sheet metal or the like by screwing, so that it can be replaced. The door is attached to the frame housing so that it can be opened and closed.
Even in such a drum-type gaming machine, the board configuration, circuit configuration, connector configuration, power supply configuration, etc. described in each embodiment can be adopted.

1 Game machine 2 Inner frame 3 Game board 4 Outer frame 6 Door 10 Side unit 13 Production button 15a Cross key 15b Decision button 20 Main control board 30 Production control board 300 Power supply board 400 Inner frame LED relay board 500 Front frame LED connection board 501 , 502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 512, 513, 601, 604, 607, 703, 704, 705, 706, 707, 708, 741, 761, 781 Buffer circuit 505, 506, 602, 603, 701, 702 P/S conversion circuit 509, 605, 606, 621, 631, 661, 663, 742, 782 LED driver 510, 511, 608, 609, 710, 711, 712, 713, 714, 715, 716 Motor driver 520, 521,670,671,790 Power separation/protection circuit 550 Relay board 600 Side unit upper right LED board 620 Side unit lower right LED board 630 Side unit upper LED board 640 Button LED connection board 660 Button LED board 700 LED connection board 720 Back of panel Left relay board 740 Decorative board 760 Relay board 780, 780', 790 LED board 800 Lower back relay board 820 Decorative board 840 Frame LED relay board

Claims (1)

A first substrate having a multi-layer structure including a surface layer forming a front surface, a back layer forming a back surface, and one or more inner layers formed between the surface layer and the back layer. ,
The first substrate is
an input connector having a terminal assigned to a first power supply voltage transmitted from a second board and a terminal assigned to a second power supply voltage transmitted from the second board;
an output connector having a terminal assigned to the first power supply voltage transmitted to a third board and a terminal assigned to the second power supply voltage transmitted to the third board;
is installed,
A first power supply pattern, which is a wiring for the first power supply voltage, and a wiring for the second power supply voltage, as a pattern having a planar area wider than the diameter of the interlayer conductive portion in one of the inner layers. A second power supply pattern is formed, which is said to be
The input connector and the output connector are attached on the first board at a position spanning the first power pattern and the second power pattern when viewed in the thickness direction of the board,
The surface layer or the back layer is provided with a pattern-free region where a conductor pattern is not formed at an end of the substrate,
The inner layer on which the first power supply pattern and the second power supply pattern are formed is located closer to the edge of the substrate than the front layer or the back layer, and has a part of the pattern-free area in the stacking direction. A gaming machine in which a conductive pattern is formed to the point where it overlaps with the part.

Images